18GABASE-126-AB GIULIA Second Edition ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Owner’s Manual ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A. 2018 OWNER’S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the , handling, , and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's . If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific Markets or particular models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped. The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

IT CAN START READ THE OWNER DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO HANDBOOK HANDS WITH ENGINE OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016S0001EM Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Doors 2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment 3 — Power Windows 6 — Windshield

9 REAR VIEW

03026S0001EM Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Trunk Lid

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036S0050EMB Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System 2 — Air Vents 6 — 10 — 3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag 4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment System

11 VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046S0001EMB Vehicle Interior 1 — Driver Seat 3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter — If Equipped 2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 4 — Hazard Warning Lights 5 — Alfa DNA System

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 14 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 16 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 18 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 19 DOORS...... 20 SEATS...... 25 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 29 STEERING WHEEL ...... 30 MIRRORS ...... 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 33 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 36 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 38 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 40 POWERWINDOWS...... 48 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . .49 HOOD...... 51 TRUNK ...... 52 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 53 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 57

13 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Door And Trunk Lid Unlock By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and trunk and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is the Information and Entertainment you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk immediately deactivated. System). or activate the Panic Alarm from distances. The key fob does not need to Push and release the unlock button on the be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! key fob once to unlock the driver side system. front door or twice within one second to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the into PARK, apply The current unlock setting can be the , turn the engine OFF, changed through the Information and remove the key fob from the vehicle and Entertainment System menu, so that the lock your vehicle. system unlocks: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or All doors unlock on the first push of with access to an unlocked vehicle. the key fob unlock button. Allowing children to be in a vehicle Unlock the driver door on the first GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of push of the key fob unlock button. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned Flashing of the turn signals upon 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal locking/unlocking the doors and Key Fob or the gear selector. activation of the courtesy light upon PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the unlocking the doors can be activated or The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to deactivated through the Information and Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power Entertainment System. For further this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the information, refer to the Information and will sound. vehicle. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Supplement. hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The doors can also be unlocked by using second. When the panic alarm is active, build-up may cause serious injury or death. the emergency key, located inside the the headlights turn on, the turn signals key fob. flash, the horn honks intermittently, and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 14 Door And Trunk Lid Lock Pushing the lock or unlock button again Briefly pushing the lock button on the key will restart the lights turn on timer (if the fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn parking lights functions were already off the interior lights, and flash the turn active, it will remain active). signals (if activated in the Information This function is available only if the doors and Entertainment System). are closed. If one or more doors are open, these Replacing The Electronic Key Fob doors will also lock, and this is indicated Battery by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The doors prepare for locking, which To replace the battery, proceed as follows: becomes active from the moment they 04016S0003EM are closed. The doors will unlock again 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward Removing Emergency Key only if the key fob is detected inside the and extract the cover pulling downwards. passenger compartment. 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter clockwise. The doors can be locked by using the emergency key in the driver’s side door lock. Trunk Lid Opening Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened. Remote Start

The remote start button on the key fob 04016S0002EM enables engine starting (push the button Key Fob Cover Removal 04016S0004EM twice within five seconds to start the Removing Battery Plug engine). 2. Remove the emergency key from its housing. Car Finder 4. Remove the battery from its slot and replace it with a new one of the same Push the lock or unlock button to type. remotely and temporarily turn on the turn signals and headlights. This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in a crowded area like a parking garage, for example. 15 Duplicating Keys IGNITION SYSTEM If you need a replacement key fob, go to Operation an authorized dealer. To activate the keyless ignition, the key General Information fob must be inside the passenger The following regulatory statement compartment. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

04016S0005EM license-exempt RSS standard(s). Battery Location Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and Caution! 2. This device must accept any 04026S0001EM interference received, including Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button interference that may cause undesired The battery replacement operation must be operation. The keyless ignition has the following done with care, in order not to damage the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE modes: electronic key. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party STOP: engine off, steering locked. responsible for compliance could void the Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Request For Additional Keys user’s authority to operate the locking system, alarm, etc.) are still The system can recognize up to eight key equipment. available. fobs with remote control. ON: all electrical devices are available. To guarantee that the engine starts and This state can be entered by pushing the the vehicle operates correctly, use only ignition button once, without pressing the electronic key fobs specifically coded for brake pedal. the vehicle’s electronics. AVV: engine starting. This state can be If an electronic key fob is coded for a entered by pushing the ignition button vehicle, it cannot be used on any other once while pressing the brake pedal. vehicle.

16 Note: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery With the keyless ignition in the ON transmission gear selector. position: if 30 minutes pass with the Do not leave the key fob in or near the If the key fob battery is discharged, gear selector in P (Park) and the engine vehicle, (or in a location accessible to proceed as follows to start the vehicle: stopped, the keyless ignition will children), and do not leave the ignition in the automatically reset to the STOP AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate 1. Lift the front . position. power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline With the engine started, it is possible found on the floor of the armrest Be sure the parking brake is fully to remove the key fob from the vehicle. compartment while pushing the disengaged before driving; failure to do so START/STOP button to start the ignition. The engine will remain running and the can lead to brake failure and a collision. instrument cluster will indicate the absence of the key fob when the door is Always fully apply the parking brake when closed. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave For more information on the engine the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in may allow the vehicle to roll and cause "Starting And Operating." damage or injury. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking Warning! brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system.

04026S0002EM Never use the PARK position as a Key Fob Placement Location substitute for the parking brake. Always Caution! apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. If the Brake System Warning Light remains When exiting the vehicle, always make on with the parking brake released, a brake sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove system malfunction is indicated. Have the the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your brake system serviced by an authorized vehicle. dealer immediately. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to 17 General Information ENGINE IMMOBILIZER then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it is still not The following regulatory statement Engine Immobilizer Operation possible to start the engine, contact an applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) authorized dealer. devices equipped in this vehicle: The Engine Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle by If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ This device complies with Part 15 of the disabling engine starting. Break-in Attempt icon is displayed FCC Rules and with Industry Canada while driving, this means that the system license-exempt RSS standard(s). The system does not need to be enabled is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a Operation is subject to the following two or activated. Operation of the voltage drop). If the display persists, conditions: immobilizer is automatic whether the vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. contact an authorized dealer. 1. This device may not cause harmful When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine Note: interference, and Immobilizer system identifies the code transmitted by the key. If the code is Do not tamper with the Engine 2. This device must accept any Immobilizer system. Any modifications interference received, including recognized as valid, the Engine Immobilizer system enables engine or alterations could cause the protection interference that may cause undesired function to be deactivated. operation. starting. When the ignition is brought back to The Engine Immobilizer system is not Note: Changes or modifications not STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system compatible with certain aftermarket expressly approved by the party deactivates the control unit controlling remote starting systems. The use of responsible for compliance could void the the engine, disabling engine starting. these devices could cause problems

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE user’s authority to operate the when starting, as well as the equipment. For the correct engine starting procedures, refer to “Starting The deactivation of the protection function. Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” All keys provided with the vehicle Irregular Operation have been programmed in accordance If the key code is not recognized during with the electronics on the vehicle itself. starting, the Engine Immobilizer Each key has its own code which must Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is be stored by the system's control unit. displayed on the instrument panel (refer Contact an authorized dealer to have to "Warning Lights And Messages" in new keys (up to eight) stored with a "Getting To Know YourInstrument code. Panel"). This condition leads to the engine turning off after two seconds. In this case, switch the ignition to STOP and

18 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — exterior door handle. For further If a second acoustic signal is emitted IF EQUIPPED information, refer to "Passive Entry" in after the alarm is already armed, wait "Doors.” about four seconds and disarm the alarm Alarm Activation by pushing the unlock button. Verify that While armed, the alarm will sound in the the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed following scenarios: correctly and then rearm the system by pushing the lock button on the key fob. Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even (perimeter protection) when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are Operation of ignition with a key which correctly closed, a fault has occurred in is not validated system operation. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. Cutting of the battery cables To Disarm The Alarm Movement inside the passenger compartment (volumetric protection — if 04056S0003EM Push the unlock button to disarm the Passive Entry Door Handle Button equipped) alarm. While disarming, the following When the alarm is armed, the warning operations are performed: Unexpected lifting/tilting of the lights on the panels of the interior front vehicle (anti-lift protection — if Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if door handles will flash. equipped) programmed) Activation of the alarm triggers the Two brief acoustic signals (if acoustic warning and the turn signals. programmed) Note: The alarm system is activated by Doors are unlocked the Engine Immobilizer system, which is automatically activated when you get out The alarm can also be disarmed using the of the vehicle with the key fob and lock Passive Entry System, by grasping one of the doors. the Passive Entry front door handles with a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For To Arm The Alarm further information refer to "Passive With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed Entry" in "Doors.” and the keyless ignition system placed in 04046S0001EM the STOP position, push and release the Lock/Unlock Buttons lock button on the key fob. The alarm can The activation of the alarm is preceded also be armed by pushing the Passive by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is Entry door handle button, located on the detected, the system emits a further acoustic signal. 19 DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside If all doors are closed properly, they will automatically lock once the vehicle has exceeded approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). Push the interior lock button on the driver or passenger side door panel trim to lock

04056S0003EM 04046S0002EM the doors. Passive Entry Door Handle Button Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button With doors locked, push the unlock button on the interior trim panel to Note: The alarm does not disarm when Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift unlock the doors. the doors are unlocked by inserting the Protection must be repeated each time blade of the emergency key, found inside the instrument panel is switched off. Note: The key fob may not be found if it the key fob, into the door handle lock is located next to a mobile phone, lap top To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive cylinder. or other electronic device; these devices Entry may block the key fob’s wireless signal. Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. Equipped during a long period of vehicle inactivity), GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To ensure the correct operation of the insert the blade of the emergency key, Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, found inside the key fob, into the door completely close the side windows. handle lock cylinder and turn the To disable the function, push the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button lock the door(s). before activating the alarm. When the function is disabled, this is indicated by the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button 04056S0001EM flashing for several seconds. Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

20 Unlock — Turn the emergency key to the left (counter clockwise) Warning! Caution! Passive Entry Do not leave children or animals inside An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always The Passive Entry system can identify parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat remove the key from the ignition and lock all the presence of a key fob near the doors build-up may cause serious injury or death. of the doors when leaving the vehicle and trunk lid. unattended. For personal security and safety in the The system enables the doors and trunk event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as lid to be locked or unlocked without you drive as well as when you park and leave Locking/Unlocking Doors From The pushing any button on the key fob. the vehicle. Outside The key fob is detected only after the system recognizes the presence of a Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When locking the doors from the outside automatic transmission into PARK, apply hand on one of the front door handles. If with the doors closed, push the lock the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, the detected key fob is valid, the doors button on the key fob. remove the key fob from the vehicle and and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to lock your vehicle. The door lock can be activated with all the Information and Entertainment Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or doors locked and the trunk lid open. When System Owner’s Manual Supplement for with access to an unlocked vehicle. the lock button on the key fob is pushed, Passive Entry Settings). all locks are activated, including the open Note: The key fob may not be able to be Allowing children to be in a vehicle trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when detected by the vehicle keyless-go unattended is dangerous for a number of it is closed. reasons. A child or others could be seriously system if it is located next to a mobile or fatally injured. Children should be warned When unlocking the doors from the phone, laptop or other electronic device; not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal outside, push the unlock button on the these devices may block the key fob’s or the gear selector. key fob. wireless signal and prevent the Do not leave the key fob in or near the Locking/Unlocking Doors From The keyless-go system from starting the vehicle, or in a location accessible to Outside In An Emergency vehicle. children. A child could operate power If the battery is discharged or the key fob Grasping the handle of the driver's door windows, other controls, or move the is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors vehicle. doors from the outside by inserting the depending on the mode set using the blade of the emergency key, found inside Information and Entertainment System the key fob, into the door handle lock (refer to the Information and cylinder and turn the emergency key as Entertainment System Owner’s Manual follows. Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). Lock — Turn the emergency key to the Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained right (clockwise) and the door handle is wet, the activation 21 sensitivity of the Passive Entry function 2. Remove the emergency key from the may be reduced, resulting in a longer key fob housing. reaction time. 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver Door Locking side door lock cylinder and turn it to the To lock the doors, proceed as follows: left (counter clockwise) to unlock the 1. Make sure that you have the key fob door. and are close to the driver’s or passenger’s side door handle. 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle button or the Passive Entry trunk lid 04056S0005EM button, which is located next to the Exterior Trunk Lid Button exterior trunk lid release button. This will Note: After pushing the Passive Entry lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door door handle button, you must wait two locking will activate the alarm as well. seconds before the doors can be unlocked again using the passive entry door handle button. This feature makes it 04016S0002EM possible to check whether the vehicle has Emergency Key Release Buttons been locked correctly by pulling the door handle within two seconds. The doors will GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE not be unlocked again. The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob or on the interior door lock. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening 04056S0003EM If the key fob does not work, e.g. because Passive Entry Door Handle Button its battery is discharged or the vehicle battery is discharged, the emergency key can be used to unlock the driver side door. 04016S0003EM Emergency Key To remove the emergency key from the key fob, proceed as follows: Note: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward The emergency key blade is not and extract the cover pulling downwards. directional and can be inserted indifferently into the lock. 22 To avoid leaving the key fob inside While pulling the handle, do not push the Trunk Lid Access the vehicle accidentally, the Passive door lock/unlock button on the handle. Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key Entry function features an automatic fob, push the opening button to access door unlocking function. the trunk lid. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the "door locking" button on the front door handles or lock button in the interior door lock switch panel is pushed, a check of the inside and outside of the vehicle for the presence of the key fob is made once all the open doors are closed.

04056S0004EM Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When

Locking 04056S0005EM If the key fob is detected inside the Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button vehicle, the Passive Entry function Note: automatically unlocks all the vehicle doors and flashes the turn signals. If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside of the trunk, and an If one or more key fobs are inside the attempt is made to close it from outside, passenger compartment, the lock button the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors on the key fob inside the passenger 04056S0003EM locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the Passive Entry Door Handle Button compartment is temporarily disabled. key fob detected inside the vehicle, the The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an trunk lid will unlock again and the lights unauthorized key fob has been detected flash twice. close to the outside of the vehicle. If the Passive Entry function is disabled Before driving, make sure the trunk using the Information and Entertainment lid is closed correctly. System, the protections to avoid Trunk Lid Lock accidentally leaving the key fob inside The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be the vehicle are deactivated. locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob, pushing the door lock button on the door handles, or pushing the lock

04056S0001EM button on the interior door panel of the Interior Lock Switch Panel vehicle. 23 On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, 2. This device must accept any The Child Safety Locks remain locked the trunk lid and the doors can be locked interference received, including even if the doors are unlocked. by pushing the button located near the interference that may cause undesired Note: The rear doors cannot be opened opening button of the trunk lid. operation. from the inside when the Child Safety Note: Changes or modifications not Lock is engaged. expressly approved by the party Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged responsible for compliance could void the Battery user’s authority to operate the equipment. Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if the vehicle battery is discharged. Child Safety Locks Rear Doors And Passenger Door To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear 1. With the doors unlocked insert the doors are equipped with Child-Protection emergency key from the key fob or a flat Door Lock system. bladed screwdriver into the door lock 04056S0005EM manual release lock cylinder. Exterior Trunk Lid Button This device can be engaged only with the doors open. System Activation/Deactivation The Passive entry system can be activated or deactivated using the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Information and Entertainment System. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the 04056S0008EM FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Door Lock Manual Release Lock license-exempt RSS standard(s). 04056S0007EM Cylinder Positions Operation is subject to the following two 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder conditions: Lock position: device locked (door clockwise for the right door locks or opened from exterior only) 1. This device may not cause harmful counterclockwise for the left door locks. Unlock position: device unlocked (door interference, and 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the may be opened from the inside) manual release lock.

24 Proceed in one of the following ways to SEATS realign the door lock device (only when The front seats can be adjusted to ensure the battery charge has been restored): maximum comfort for the occupants. Push the lock button on the electronic When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep key the shoulders resting firmly against the backrest, and the wrists within reach of Push the unlock button on the door the top of the steering wheel. The driver panel must also be able to fully press the brake Unlock driver’s door lock with the pedal. emergency key Operate the internal door handle 04066S0003EM Warning! Adjustment Note: For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks are engaged, and the 1 — Seat Adjustment previously described locking procedure is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, 2 — Recline Adjustment carried out, operating the internal handle inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 3 — Lumbar Adjustment people riding in these areas are more likely will not open the door. Instead, it will only to be seriously injured or killed. realign the lock release device. To open the door, the outside handle must be Do not allow people to ride in any area of used. The door central locking/unlocking your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Caution! buttons are not deactivated when the and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously emergency lock is engaged. injured or killed. Do not place any article under a power seat Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a or impede its ability to move as it may cause seat and using a properly. damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Power Seats The power seat switches are located on Forward/Rearward Adjustment the outboard side of the seat near the Push the seat switch forward or rearward floor. Use these switches to move the to adjust to your desired position. driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to recline the seatback.

25 Seatback Recline Driver Memory Seat The angle of the seatback can be Storing and recalling can be done with the adjusted forward or rearward. Push the ignition in the ON mode, vehicle speed at seatback switch in the desired direction, 0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side door and the seat will move in the direction of closed, or for three minutes after having the switch. Release the switch when the opened the driver's side door. An audible desired position is reached. chime is heard to confirm a memory profile is set or recalled. To set a memory Power Lumbar profile, first adjust your seat (and power The power lumbar switch is located on mirror position if desired) until you are in the outboard side of the power seat. Push the desired position. Then, push the the switch forward or rearward to 04066S0015EM Seatback Width Adjustment memory button you want to assign the increase or decrease the lumbar support. set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a Push the switch upward or downward to 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons new seat position is memorized, the raise or lower the lumbar support. 5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons previously memorized position on the Height Adjustment same button is automatically overwritten. Recalling a memorized The height of the seats can be adjusted Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped up or down. Pull upward or push position can also be done for Lift the adjustment lever and push the approximately three minutes after the downward on the seat switch, and the front of the cushion forward or rearward seat will move in the direction of the doors are opened and for approximately to extend the cushion by a few inches one minute after the engine is stopped. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE switch. Release the switch when the (centimeters). desired position is reached. To recall a memorized position, push the assigned button briefly. Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If Equipped The seat angle can be adjusted in four Warning! directions. Lift or push the front part of seat switch to move the front part of the seat in the corresponding direction. Adjusting a seat while driving may be Release the seat switch when the seat dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could has reached the desired position. cause a collision and serious injury or death. Power Bolster Adjustment — If Seats should be adjusted before Equipped 04066S0017EM fastening the seat belts and while the Seat Cushion Extension Push the power bolster adjustment vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death buttons to regulate the width of the 6 — Adjustment Lever could result from a poorly adjusted seat backrest through the lateral padding. belt. 26 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so A quick push of the heated seat button Rear Seats that the shoulder belt is no longer resting will select the heat levels in order of The rear seats allow for three against your chest. In a collision you could highest to lowest. A fourth push of the passengers. slide under the seat belt, which could result button will turn the heated seat off. in serious injury or death. The “minimum” setting is automatically Note: Middle Seat: The rear seat is deactivated once a certain period of time designed as a 4+1 seat vehicle. The has elapsed. This varies on a middle seat is of limited use. It is Heated Seats — If Equipped recommended that this seat only be used With the engine in the ON position, push case-by-case basis, in accordance with the specific operating conditions. by a person who can use the backrest as a the driver or passenger heated seat substitute for the head restraint. button located on the instrument Rear Heated Seats panel. If equipped with rear heated seats, the controls can be found on the rear of the center console and will function the same as the front heated seat controls. Note: To preserve the battery charge, this function cannot be activated when the engine is off.

Warning! 04066S0005EM Rear Seat 04066S0004EM Heated Seat Buttons Persons who are unable to feel pain to the The seats and the seatbelts are skin because of advanced age, chronic considered components of the vehicle’s Youcan select three heating levels: illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, Occupant Restraint System. medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other Maximum — three orange indicators physical condition must exercise care when Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems" illuminated on the buttons using the seat heater. It may cause burns in "Safety" for further information. even at low temperatures, especially if used Average — two orange indicators for long periods of time. Split Folding Rear Seat illuminated on the buttons The rear seatbacks can be folded Do not place anything on the seat or forward to provide an additional storage Minimum — one orange indicator seatback that insulates against heat, such illuminated on the buttons as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the area. After selecting a heating level, heat will seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause be felt within a few minutes. serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 27 Partial Extension Of The Luggage Full Expansion Of The Trunk Compartment (1/3 Or 2/3) Tilting the rear seat forward completely Warning! Extending the right side of the trunk allows maximum loading volume. allows you to carry two passengers on Proceed as follows: the left part of the rear seat, while Be certain that the seatback is securely extending the left side allows you to 1. Completely lower the rear seat head locked into position. If the seatback is not carry one passenger. restraints. securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats Proceed as follows: 2. Place the seatbelts so that they don't and/or passengers. An improperly latched 1. Completely lower the rear seat head impede the movement of the backrest seat could cause serious injury. restraints. while tilting it. Center Backrest Section Tilting 2. Place the seatbelt so that it doesn't 3. From inside the luggage impede the movement of the backrest compartment, use levers 1 and 2 to fold The center backrest can be tilted forward while tilting it. down the backrests; these will fold down for a “Ski-Pass Through” feature from the forwards automatically. If necessary, trunk. Before tilting the backrest, make 3. From inside the luggage accompany the backrests during the sure that the rear center seatbelt is not compartment, operate lever 1 to tilt the initial stage of tilting. fastened and that there are not any left part or lever 2 to tilt the right part of objects in the middle part of the cushion. Repositioning The Backrests the backrest: it will automatically tilt Using the release strap, release the forward. If necessary, assist the backrest Move the seatbelts to the side, making center part of the backrest from its during the initial stage of tilting. sure that they are correctly extended and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE housing and tilt it using the head not twisted, and that they are not restraint. trapped behind the backrests of the seats. Make sure the seatbelts are in the front of the seatback and lift the backrests, pushing them back until you hear the locking click on both latch mechanisms.

04066S0007EM Seat Release Levers 04066S0008EM 1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever Center Backrest Section Tilting 2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever 28 Center Backrest Section Repositioning HEAD RESTRAINTS Downward adjustment: Push the adjustment button and push downward Using the head restraint, lift the center Head restraints are designed to reduce portion upwards, accompanying it during the risk of injury by restricting head on the head restraint to lower. its movement, and lightly push to make movement in the event of a rear impact. sure that it is properly attached. Make Head restraints should be adjusted so sure that the armrest is properly that the top of the head restraint is Warning! attached by attempting to move it. If it is located above the top of your ear. not attached, repeat the operation. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat Warning! until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious Head restraints should never be adjusted injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a Always securely stow removed head vehicle with the head restraints improperly restraints in a location outside the occupant adjusted or removed could cause serious compartment. injury or death in the event of a collision. ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect Note: To allow maximum visibility for the the occupants. Follow the re-installation driver, if the head restraints are not in instructions above prior to operating the use, lower the head restraint all the way. vehicle or occupying a seat. Do not place items over the top of the Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of Warning! the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. The front head restraints may be height-adjustable. To adjust them, Head restraints should never be adjusted operate as follows: while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly Upward adjustment: Raise the head adjusted or removed could cause serious restraint until it clicks into place. injury or death in the event of a collision. 29 The height of the outboard head Head Restraints (Removal) STEERING WHEEL restraints can be adjusted. The head To remove the head restraints, proceed restraint of the center seat can only be Adjustments as follows: removed. The height cannot be adjusted. This feature allows you to tilt the For upward adjustment, pull up on the 1. Raise the head restraints to their steering column upward or downward. It head restraint until it clicks into place. maximum height. also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping For downward adjustment, push in the 2. Push the adjustment button and the adjustment button and lower the head lever is located below the steering wheel release button at the side of the two at the end of the steering column. restraint while holding the button to the supports. desired height. 3. Remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards. To reinstall the head restraints, proceed as follows: 1. Hold down both the adjustment button and release button while placing the head restraint post into the holes. 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the appropriate height for the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04076S0002EM passengers. Rear Head Restraint 1 — Adjustment Button Warning! 2 — Release Button A loose head restraint thrown forward in Note: To allow maximum visibility for the a collision or hard stop could cause serious driver, if the head restraints are not in injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. use, lower the head restraint all the way. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. 30 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Warning! While the engine is running, push the heated steering wheel button on the instrument panel. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position: 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the 04086S0002EM Heated Steering Wheel Button desired position. When the function is enabled, the 3. Lock the desired position by pushing indicator on the button will illuminate. the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to the closed position. Warning!

04086S0001EM Warning! Steering Wheel Adjustment Persons who are unable to feel pain to the 1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle skin because of advanced age, chronic It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, A — Open after-market operation involving steering medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other B — Closed system or steering column modifications physical conditions must exercise care when (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that using the steering wheel heater. It may could adversely affect performance. Doing cause burns even at low temperatures, so could void the New Vehicle Limited especially if used for long periods. Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also Do not place anything on the steering result in the vehicle not meeting wheel that insulates against heat, such as a type-approval requirements. blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

31 MIRRORS Automatic Activation Electrochromic Mirror Activating the central door locking system from outside the vehicle This mirror automatically adjusts for automatically folds the mirrors. The headlight glare from vehicles behind you. mirrors return to the driving position The electrochromic mirror has a power when the vehicle is then unlocked. button to activate/deactivate the If the door mirrors were folded using the automatic dimming/anti-glaring function. power mirror control knob, they can only be returned to the driving position by rotating the knob again.

04106S0004EM Note: The power folding operation can be Power Mirror Control enabled only when the vehicle speed is 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can only be manually controlled up to that speed. A — Left B — Right Automatic Dimming Mirrors C — Power Folding Position Like the electrochromic mirror, an D — Neutral automatic dimming feature is also available on the outside rear view mirrors 04106S0002EM to prevent glare. The automatic dimming Electrochromic Mirror Power Button To adjust the selected mirror, push the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE button is the same for all rear view mirrors. knob in the direction desired. When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the automatic dimming feature is Note: Once adjustment is complete, Warning! deactivated. rotate the knob to the neutral position to prevent accidental movements. Outside Power Mirrors Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside Power Folding convex mirror will look smaller and farther Power Adjustment With the power mirror control knob in the away than they really are. Relying too much on The power mirrors can be adjusted with side convex mirrors could cause you to collide neutral position, move it to the power with another vehicle or other object. Use your the ignition ON. folding position. Move the knob again to inside mirror when judging the size or distance Select the desired mirror using the power return the mirrors to the driving position. of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. mirror control. If the power mirror control knob is moved again during door mirror folding (from Heated Mirrors closed to open position and vice versa), the movement direction is reversed. Push the rear defrost button in the climate controls to activate the heated mirrors. 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only The DRL can be activated/deactivated when the ignition is in the ON position, from the Information and Entertainment Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to System, by selecting the following The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more functions in sequence on the main MENU: of the steering wheel on the instrument information. 1. “Settings.” panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the will be 2. “Lights.” instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on. 3. “Daytime Running Lights.” lights. In addition, there are buttons for parking Automatic Headlights Note: The Daytime Running Lights sensors deactivation and stop/start. cannot be deactivated in Canadian This system automatically turns the markets. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for headlights on or off according to ambient further information. light levels. Rear Fog Light Function Activation The rear fog light switch is integrated From the O (off) position, turn the light with the headlight switch. switch to the (AUTO) position. Push the button to turn the rear fog Note: The function can only operate with lights on/off. the ignition position cycled to ON. The rear fog lights turn on only when the headlights or parking lights are turned on. Function Deactivation The lights can be turned off by pushing To deactivate the function, turn the light the button again or by turning the switch to a position other than the headlight switch to the O (off) position. (AUTO) position. When the engine is stopped with the rear 04126S0001NA Headlight Switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) fog lights on, they will remain off the next With the ignition cycled to ON, and the time the engine is started. 1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But- light switch turned to the position, if Parking Lights ton the dusk sensor detects sufficient 2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running external light, the Daytime Running With the ignition in the STOP position, Lights, Headlight Switch Lights will turn on automatically while the turn the headlight switch to the 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer other lights remain off. position to turn the parking lights on. 4 — Rear Fog Light Button If the turn signals are operated, the All of the parking lights will turn on for 5 — Stop/Start Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime eight minutes, and opening the door Running Lights will be decreased as long activates an audible warning. as the turn signals are on. 33 To leave only the lights on one side Function Deactivation (right/left) illuminated, you must move This function is deactivated by turning on the multifunction lever (located on the the headlights, the side lights, or by left side of the steering wheel) to the side cycling the ignition to ON. that you want to remain on. With the parking lights on, the warning light on Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS the instrument panel will illuminate. Function) — If Equipped Note: Cycling the ignition to ON turns off This is a system combined with Xenon the parking lights, which were only headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if illuminated on one side. equipped) which directs the headlights horizontally, and continuously and Headlight Off Delay automatically adapts them to the driving 04126S0020EM Multifunction Lever The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays conditions around bends or when the turning off of the headlights for a set cornering. The high beam headlights are turned off time when the ignition is cycled OFF. The system directs the headlights to light by pulling the lever to its original position. The function can be activated from the up the road in the best way, taking into The warning light/icon will turn off in Information and Entertainment System account the speed of the vehicle and the the instrument panel when the headlights by selecting the following functions in bend or corner angle, as well as the speed are turned off. sequence on the main menu: of steering. Flashing The Headlights The adaptive lights are automatically 1. “Settings.” Pulling the multifunction lever toward the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE activated when the vehicle is started. steering wheel will activate the high 2. “Lights.” High Beam Headlights beam headlights manually. The lights will remain on as long as the lever is held. 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” To activate the fixed high beam headlights, push the multifunction lever, Once the lever is released, the lights will The side lights and the headlights stay on located on the left side of the steering resume the previous position. for a time that can be set between 30, wheel, towards the instrument panel. The 60, and 90 seconds. headlight switch must be turned to the Function Activation (AUTO) or (ON) position. With the headlights on, cycle the ignition With high beam headlights on, the to STOP,the timer will then start. High Beam Indicator on the Note: To activate this function, the instrument panel will illuminate. headlights must be deactivated within two minutes after the ignition has been cycled to STOP.

34 Automatic High Beam Headlights — If If the multifunction lever is pushed again Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — Equipped with the Automatic High Beam If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlights Headlights activated, the Automatic High The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting system provides increased forward Beam Headlights function deactivates. Diodes (LEDs) in order to better lighting at night by automating high beam To deactivate the automatic headlight illuminate the street and increase the control through the use of a digital function, rotate the headlight switch to light angle while turning. This function is camera mounted on the windshield. This the position. enabled by rotating the light switch to camera detects vehicle specific light and Note: If the system recognizes heavy position or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs automatically switches from high beams traffic areas, the automatic functions activate when the speed is below 25 mph to low beams until the approaching remain disabled independently of the (40 km/h). vehicle is out of view. vehicle’s speed. This function can be activated/ This function is enabled with the deactivated on the Information and Turn Signals Information and Entertainment System, Entertainment System by selecting the and can only be activated with the light To activate the turn signals function, following functions in sequence on the switch turned to (AUTO). move the multifunction lever, located on main menu: the left side of the steering wheel, up or If the high beam headlights are on, the down until it reaches the detent. Moving 1. “Settings.” blue icon/warning light will illuminate the lever upward flashes the right turn in the instrument panel. 2. “Lights.” signal and moving the lever downward When the speed is higher than 37 mph will flash the left turn signal. 3. “Cornering Lights.” (60 km/h) and the function is active, the The or turn signal will blink on the lights will turn off if the multifunction instrument panel. lever is pushed again. The turn signals turn off automatically When the speed is lower than 15 mph when the vehicle is brought back onto a (25 km/h) and the function is active, the straight course. function switches the high beam headlights off. “Lane Change” Function If the high beam headlights are operated Tap the lever up or down once, without quickly again (pushing the multifunction moving beyond the detent, and the turn lever towards the instrument panel), the signal (right or left) will flash five times. warning light/icon will illuminate in the Then, the turn signal (right or left) will instrument panel, and the high beam automatically turn off. headlights will turn on constantly until To turn off the flashing before the end of the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). the cycle, move the lever in the opposite When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is direction until the first click (about half exceeded again, the automatic way). functioning is reactivated. 35 INTERIOR LIGHTS being drained once the doors are closed. After 15 minutes to preserve the If a light is left on accidently, the battery. Front Map Reading Lights overhead lights turn off automatically Timing While Getting Out Of The The front map/reading and overhead approximately 15 minutes after the Vehicle lights are mounted in the overhead engine has been turned OFF. After cycling the ignition to STOP,the console. Each light can be turned on by Overhead Light Timing overhead lights will turn on as follows: pushing the corresponding switch on the console. These switches are backlit for To assist getting in and out of the vehicle For a few seconds after the engine night time visibility. To turn the lights off, at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed stops. push the switch a second time. modes are available to keep the interior lighting on after the engine is cycled OFF. For approximately three minutes when Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle one of the doors is opened. The overhead lights will illuminate as For a few seconds when the last door follows: is closed. For a few seconds when the doors are The timing ends automatically when the unlocked. doors are locked. For approximately three minutes when Vanity Mirror Lights one of the doors is opened. On the driver and passenger , For a few seconds when the doors are there is a light which illuminates the sun visor mirror when folded down. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04136S0001EM locked. Overhead Console Timing is interrupted when the ignition is 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch cycled to ON. 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Exiting Overhead Light Timing 3 — Overhead Lights Switch The overhead lights will turn off as 4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch follows: 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light After all doors are closed upon Switch entering the vehicle, the three minute 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a second timer will 7 — Center Reading/Map Light start for the overhead lights. This timing 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light will end when the ignition is cycled to ON. 04136S0002EM Sun Visor Mirror When the doors are locked (either with Note: Before getting out of the vehicle, key fob or with key inserted on driver’s 1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover ensure that the overhead lights are off. side door). This will prevent the battery level from 36 The courtesy light turns on automatically Door Light Rear Overhead Light by lifting the cover. This vehicle is equipped with door courtesy The rear overhead lights are activated or Glove Compartment Light lamps that illuminate the entry way for the deactivated by two on/off switches This light turns on automatically when the driver or passenger when the door is located within the lights on the ceiling glove compartment is opened and turns opened, and turns off when it is closed. above the rear seats. off when it is closed. The light turns on and off regardless of The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status. the ignition status.

04136S0004EM Rear Overhead Light 04136S0007EM 1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light Door Light 04136S0003EM 2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Glove Compartment Light As part of the "Passive Entry" system, 3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch Interior Ambient Lighting another light can be found under each 4 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light The brightness of the interior lighting can exterior door handle. Switch be adjusted via the Information and Entertainment System. The light turns on when a door is opened. To access the adjustment function, on the Note: The light will turn off main menu select the following items in automatically after a few minutes if a sequence: door is left open. To turn it on again, open 1. "Settings." another door or close and reopen the same door. 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting." 3. "Lights."

The lights can be adjusted to seven 04136S0005EM different levels of brightness. Exterior Door Handle Light 37 Courtesy Trunk Lights Instrument Panel Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS The trunk features two courtesy lights. With the daytime running lights or Windshield Wiper Stalk These courtesy lights turn on headlights on, rotate the dimmer control upward to increase the instrument panel The windshield wiper stalk is located on automatically when the trunk is opened the right side of the steering wheel. and turn off when it is closed. brightness and the control button icons. Rotate the dimmer control downward to The windshield wipers will only operate decrease brightness. with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.

04136S0006B In cold weather, always turn off the wiper Courtesy Trunk Lights switch and allow the wipers to return to the 04126S0055EM “Park” position before turning off the The courtesy lights will turn on and off Dimmer Control engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the regardless of the ignition status.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle will automatically turn off after is restarted. 15 minutes to preserve battery life. Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

38 Windshield Wiper/Washers Rain Sensors Rotating the switch to the position, Warning! activates the first, less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Rotating the switch to the position, Sudden loss of visibility through the activates the second, more sensitive windshield could lead to a collision. You level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more windshield during freezing weather, warm information on how this system the windshield with the defroster before and functions. during windshield washer use. Windshield Washer Operation

04146S000118 Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Rain Sensor Windshield Wiper Switch to operate the windshield washer. The Rain Sensor is located behind the Operation: The switch on the wiper Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the interior rear view mirror. This feature stalk can be set to the following windshield washer jet and the windshield senses moisture on the windshield and positions: wiper with a single movement. The wipers automatically activates the wipers for and washers will continue to operate until Windshield Wiper Off. the driver. you let go of the stalk. Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. The windshield wiper stops working three High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. strokes after the stalk is released, Low Continuous Wiper Speed. followed by a final stroke six seconds High Continuous Wiper Speed. later to complete the cycle. Windshield Wiper Operation Mist Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather activates the first (low) level continuous conditions make occasional usage of the speed of the windshield wipers in manual wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward mode. to the MIST position and release for a Rotating the switch to the position single wiping cycle. This function is useful 04146S0002B activates the second (high) level to remove small deposits of dust from Rain Sensor the windshield or morning dew. continuous speed of the windshield The feature is especially useful for road wipers in manual mode. Note: This function does not activate the splash or over spray from the windshield windshield washer. To spray windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the washer fluid onto the windshield, the end of the multifunction lever to one of washing function must be used. four settings to activate this feature. 39 The sensor has an adjustment range that Deactivation CLIMATE CONTROL varies progressively from wiper still (no Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition Passenger Compartment Air Vents stroke) when the windshield is dry, to to STOP. wiper at continuous speed (fast In the event of malfunction of the rain Side Air Vents operation) with intense rain. sensor while it is active, the windshield To adjust the position of the Side Air Activation wiper operates intermittently at a speed Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster Rotating the wiper switch to position consistent with the sensitivity setting of (2) in any direction. or activates the rain sensor. the rain sensor, whether or not there is Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) rain on the glass for as long as the sensor The activation of the rain sensor system to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side failure is indicated on the display. is done by tapping the wiper stalk Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close The sensor continues to operate and it is upwards while the switch is in the or the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise position. possible to set the windshield wiper to continuous mode or . The failure will open the vent. The variation in sensitivity during rain indication remains on for as long as the sensor operation is also signaled by a sensor is active. stroke of the wiper (command acquired and implemented). This stroke is also The rain sensor is able to recognize and executed with the windshield dry. automatically adjust itself in the presence of the following conditions: If the windshield washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing Presence of dirt on the controlled

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE cycle is performed, after which the rain surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). sensor resumes its normal automatic Presence of streaks of water caused operation. by the worn window wiper blades. Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area clean. Difference between day and night. 04156S0002EM Side Air Vents 1 — Demister Air Vents 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

40 Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction. Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Adjuster (3) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent. down will close the vents.

04156S0004EM

04156S0003EM Rear Air Vents Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster 4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

41 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System Controls

04156V0005EM GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Climate Control System 1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — Knob If Equipped 2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 — Air Conditioning Button matic Operation) Selection Button 3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped 4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button ment Knob — If Equipped 5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 — Air Recirculation Button Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

42 Compressor variations (for A/C activation Caution! cooling/dehumidifying the air) Front Defroster Air recirculation Air recirculation The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which The Climate Control System can also be Rear Defroster does not pollute the environment in the operated manually by using the buttons System deactivation event of accidental leakage. Under no and knobs on the faceplate. circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, Manual selections will override the Operating Mode which are incompatible with the components automatic settings, which are stored until of this system. The Climate Control system can be the AUTO button is pushed. If the system activated in different ways. It is intervenes for safety reasons, the recommended to use the automatic Description automatic setting will take control of the function. Push the AUTO button and set system. The Automatic Dual Zone Climate the desired temperatures. Control System adjusts the temperature The below operations will not deactivate The automatic system adjusts the and air distribution independently the automatic (AUTO) function: temperature, quantity, and distribution between the driver and passenger. Air Recirculation activation/ of air introduced into the passenger The system maintains the set deactivation compartment. It also controls air temperature inside the passenger A/C activation/deactivation recirculation and the activation of the air conditioner. compartment and compensates for SYNC function activation outside temperature change. At any time during automatic operation, Rear Window Defrost activation/ Note: The reference temperature is you can change the temperature, activate 72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort deactivation or deactivate the Rear Defroster, management. When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s activate SYNC, activate or deactivate The automatic setting will adjust the internal temperature is controlled the air conditioner, and activate or following to maintain comfort within the according to the set temperature. deactivate air recirculation. The system passenger compartment: The following can be manually set or will automatically adjust to the new settings. Air temperature from the driver/front adjusted: passenger side vents Driver/passenger air temperature Air distribution from the driver/front Blower speed (continuous variation) passenger side vents Air distribution (seven positions for Fan speed (continuous variation of the driver and passenger) air flow)

43 Climate Control Display Settings Push the SYNC button to sync the driver Air flow distributed between the and passenger air temperatures. The Climate Control settings are visible floor vents (hotter air) and the on the Information and Entertainment Rotate the passenger Temperature central and side dashboard vents Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC System radio screen. (cooler air). This air distribution function. This will set a new passenger The display on the Information and side temperature. setting is useful on sunny days Entertainment System is a pop up during spring and autumn. window (1), which is activated by pushing Rotate the Temperature Adjustment the buttons or turning the knobs on the Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI Air flow distributed between the Climate Control system. The indicator (maximum heating) setting or fully floor vents, windshield, and front lights located on the number of buttons counterclockwise to engage the LO side window defrosting/demisting and knobs indicate that the selected (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate vents. This distribution setting these functions, rotate the Temperature feature is on/off. If no operation is warms the passenger compartment performed for a predetermined time, the Adjustment Knob to the desired temperature. while preventing the windows from pop-up will close on the display. fogging up. Rear passengers’ temperature is linked to driver side selection. Air flow distribution between the Air Distribution Selection windshield demisting/defrosting vents, and side/central dashboard Push the Air Distribution Selection vents. This distribution setting button on the faceplate to change the sends air to the windshield in sunny GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE mode of air distribution. conditions. Air flow to the windshield and Air flow distribution to all vents on demister window vents to the vehicle. demist/defrost them. In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls 0521128655US Air flow at the central and side 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display automatically manage the air dashboard vents to ventilate the distribution. When set manually, the Air Temperature Adjustment chest and the face. respective symbols on the Information Rotate the driver or passenger and Entertainment System indicate the Air flow to the front and rear floor air distribution setting. Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise vents. This setting heats the for warmer temperatures or passenger compartment the counterclockwise for cooler quickest. temperatures. The set temperatures are shown on the Information and Entertainment System. 44 Fan Speed Adjustment If air distribution or the fan speed is Forced deactivation (air recirculation manual adjusted, the AUTO button Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase always off with intake of outside air): indicator will turn off to indicate that the or decrease the blower speed. The speed both indicators not illuminated on the Air Climate Control system is no longer in is displayed with lighted indicators in the Recirculation Button AUTO mode. Information and Entertainment System The three operating conditions are display. After a manual adjustment, push the AUTO button to resume the automatic obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation Maximum fan speed = all indicators system. Button in sequence. illuminated on the Information and SYNC Button Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Entertainment System display Function — If Equipped Minimum fan speed = one indicator Push the SYNC button (indicator When the automatic recirculation illuminated on the Information and illuminated) to sync the passenger side function is selected, the AQS function Entertainment System display air temperature with the driver side air automatically activates internal air temperature. The fan can be turned off by rotating the recirculation when the outside air is This function makes temperature Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). regulation easier when the driver is the off position (all segments on the At low external temperatures or in high traveling alone. Information and Entertainment System humidity, the automatic function turns display are turned off). Turn the passenger Temperature off to avoid fogging up the windows. The Adjustment Knob or push the passenger Note: To restore automatic control of user can select the function again by side Air Distribution Selection Button to the fan speed, push the AUTO button. pushing the Air Recirculation Button. change the passenger side air In automatic operation, air recirculation AUTO Button temperature and return to separate air will be controlled by the system temperature management. When the AUTO button is pushed according to outside environmental (indicator illuminated), the Climate Air Recirculation And Air Quality conditions. Control system automatically adjusts the System (AQS) Note: following settings: Air Recirculation is managed according to With the AQS function active and Quantity and distribution of air flow in the following operating mode: the passenger compartment after the internal air recirculation Automatic engagement: indicator is system has been functioning for a set The air conditioner illuminated above the “A”on the Air amount of time, the Climate Control Air recirculation Recirculation Button System enables air intake to cycle the Cancels any manual settings Forced activation (air circulation air in the passenger compartment for a always activated): indicator illuminated set time. The AQS function is disabled Selecting the AUTO function illuminates during the air changes. the indicator on the A/C button . above the icon on the Air Recirculation Button 45 The engagement of the recirculation temperature. Under certain Pushing the button switches off the system makes it possible to reach the environmental conditions, windows could MAX-DEF function. required heating or cooling conditions fog up rapidly, since the air is not Rear Defroster faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use dehumidified. it on rainy/cold days as it can increase Push the Rear Defroster button to Front Defroster And MAX-DEF the possibility of the windows fogging. activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear Function When the outside temperature is low, Defroster. recirculation is forced off to prevent the Push the Front Defroster button The Rear Defroster will turn off after windows from fogging up. (indicator illuminated) to defrost the 20 minutes or once the engine is turned windshield and side windows. off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push A/C Compressor While in MAX-DEF function, the air the Rear Defroster button. Push the A/C button to activate or conditioner will: Note: To avoid damage, do not apply deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator Activate the air conditioner stickers over the interior heating illuminated when activated). The A/C compressor when the weather allows filaments of the Rear Defroster. compressor will remain off even after the engine has stopped. Turn air recirculation off Humidity Sensor When the A/C compressor is turned off, Set the maximum air temperature (HI) The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the the system deactivates air recirculation on both the driver and passenger side windows from fogging up. The AUTO to prevent the windows from fogging up. Activate a blower speed based on the function (indicator illuminated) must be If the climate control system can temperature of the engine coolant on for the Humidity Sensor to function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE maintain the temperature, with the A/C Adjust the air flow towards the When outside temperature is low, the turned off, the AUTO feature will remain windshield and front side windows system may turn the compressor on and on and the AUTO button indicator light turn air recirculation off for safer driving. will not switch off. Activate the Rear Window Defroster Switching Off/On The Climate Control To restore automatic control of the A/C Display the fan speed (indicators System compressor, push the A/C button or the illuminated) and current air distribution AUTO button. With the A/C compressor setting Switching Off The Climate Control off, the air speed can be set manually System Note: The MAX-DEF function remains using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob. Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob active for approximately three minutes When the A/C compressor is on, and the completely counterclockwise to turn off once the engine coolant reaches the engine is running, air speed cannot be the Climate Control System. proper temperature. lower than the minimum speed (only one With the air conditioner off: indicator light is lit). When the function is on, AUTO mode will deactivate. The only manual operations Air recirculation is on Note: When the A/C is off the Climate possible are adjusting blower speed and The A/C compressor is off Control system can not produce air that turning off the Rear Window Defroster. is colder than the current outside The fan is off 46 The heated rear window can be When the Stop/Start system is active, Additional Heater — If Equipped activated/deactivated the engine will restart if the inside Note: The additional heater temperature changes significantly, or if Note: The climate control system stores automatically operates if the outside the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is temperature and engine coolant the previously set temperatures and activated. resumes operation when any button on temperature are low. The heater will not the system is pushed. With Stop/Start system on, air flow is operate if battery voltage is low. reduced to keep the compartment System Maintenance Switching On The Climate Control comfort conditions for longer. System Until the temperature drastically In winter, the Climate Control System To switch the climate control system on changes within the cabin, the climate must be turned on at least once a month in automatic mode, push the AUTO control system will continue to maintain for approximately ten minutes. button. the temperature while the engine is off. Have the system inspected at an Stop/Start By deactivating the Stop/Start system authorized dealer before the summer. with the button located on the The climate control system manages the dashboard, the climate control system Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the will take priority over the engine shutting engine shut off when vehicle speed is off. 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort within the vehicle. Note: Stop/Start will deactivate in the In harsh climate conditions, limit the following scenarios: use of the Stop/Start system to prevent The climate control system is in AUTO the compressor from continuously mode (indicator illuminated), and the switching on and off. This will cause vehicle has yet to reach the set rapid misting of the windows and the accumulation of humidity in the temperature passenger compartment. The climate control system is in LO maximum cooling When the Stop/Start system is on, the climate control system will always The climate control system is in HI take air in from outside, reducing the maximum heating probability of the windows fogging up. The climate control system is in the MAX-DEF status

47 POWER WINDOWS Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children Power Window Switches Push the buttons to open the desired window. inside the vehicle. The power window switches work with Each button has two position steps. Push The anti-pinch safety function is the ignition in the ON position and for gently (first position step) for manual activated both during the manual and the three minutes after the ignition has been "burst" window travel, while pushing the automatic operation of the window. placed in the STOP position. When one of same button harder (second position When the anti-pinch system is activated, the front doors is opened, this operation step) activates "continuous automatic" the window closing is immediately is disabled. operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is Driver Side Front Door Controls If the button is pushed again, the window automatically reversed and the window The switches are located on the door will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in panel trim. All windows can be controlled Window Closing relation to the first stop position. The from the driver side door panel. window cannot be operated during this Pull the window switch up to move the time. window upward. Hold the switch for at least half of a second and the window will Note: In the event of an error, or if the go up automatically. anti-pinch protection is activated three consecutive times, the automatic closing To stop the window during Auto-Up operation of the window will be operation, push or pull the window switch deactivated. In order to restore the again. correct operation of the system, the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door window must be lowered. Controls Power Window System Initialization There are single window controls on the If power supply is interrupted, the passenger and rear door trim panels electric window automatic operation 04166S0001EM which operate the door windows. Power Window Switches must be reinitialized. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch To perform the initialization procedure, 1 — Front Left 4 — Window Protection which must be done on each door with the Window Switch Lockout Switch The vehicle may be equipped with an doors closed, manually fully close the 2 — Front Right 5 — Rear Left anti-pinch safety device for closing the window to be initialized. Window Switch Window Switch windows. 3 — Rear Right If the safety system senses any obstacle Window Switch while the window is closing, it will stop the window’s movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

48 POWER SUNROOF — IF In a collision, there is a greater risk of EQUIPPED being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured Power Sunroof or killed. Always fasten your seat belt The power sunroof consists of two glass properly and make sure all passengers are panels (the front one is power and the also properly secured. rear one fixed) and is fitted with a power Do not allow small children to operate the sunshade in the front, as well as a sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other manually operated sunshade in the rear. body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Operation of the sunroof is only possible with the ignition cycled to the ON 04186S0001EM position. Refer to “Ignition” in this Opening Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons chapter for further information. To open the sunroof’s front panel, push 1 — Power Shade Open/Close The sunroof has three preset positions: the open/close button toward the rear of 2 — Open/Close Button Fully closed. the vehicle to open to the comfort 3 — Vent Open/Close position (half way). Pushing the button a Comfort (intermediate opening). second time will open to the fully open Fully open. position. Note: Youcannot have the sunshade The automatic motion can be interrupted Caution! closed when the sunroof is open. in any position by pushing the open/close button again. Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun Warning! roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it.

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked Closing vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to From the fully open position, push the children. Do not leave the ignition of a open/close button toward the front of vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the the vehicle. The roof will close ON mode. Occupants, particularly completely. unattended children, can become entrapped The automatic motion can be interrupted by the power sunroof while operating the in any position by pushing the open/close power sunroof switch. Such entrapment button again. may result in serious injury or death. 49 Vent Opening Pinch Protect Feature 5. Within five seconds, hold the open/close button down. The roof will To bring the roof into vent position, push The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety perform a complete automatic opening and release the vent button. system capable of detecting the and closing cycle (to indicate that the presence of an obstacle during the This type of vent opening can be initialization procedure has been closing movement. If an obstacle is activated regardless of the position of successful). If this does not occur, the detected, the system intervenes and the the sunroof. When starting with the roof procedure must be restarted from the movement of the sunroof is immediately in the closed position, pushing the vent beginning. button automatically causes the sunroof reversed into opening. to open to the vent position. If the roof is Initialization Procedure already open, the button must be held until the roof reaches the vent-opening Automatic operation of the sunroof must position. be initialized again in case of faulty Pushing vent button again during sunroof operation. It may also be automatic movement of the roof will necessary to initialize the sunroof after stop it. the vehicle’s battery as been disconnected and then reconnected. Sun Shade Movement Proceed as follows: The front sunshade is power operated. 1. Push the open/close button to bring Push the Power Shade open/close button the roof into the completely closed toward the rear of the vehicle to open the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE position. front sun shade to the three quarter open position. Pushing the button a second 2. Cycle the ignition to the STOP time will open the sunshade completely. position and wait at least ten seconds. Push the Power Shade open/close button 3. Cycle the ignition to the AVVposition. toward the front of the vehicle to close Refer to “Ignition” in this chapter for the sun shade. further information. The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the Power 4. Hold the open/close button down for Shade on/off button again. at least ten seconds. Youshould then hear the mechanical stop of the roof To open the rear sunshade, pull sunshade motor. manually toward the rear of the vehicle.

50 HOOD Closing Opening To close, lower the hood to approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from To open the hood, proceed as follows: the engine compartment then let it drop. 1. Pull the release lever located on the Make sure that the hood is completely driver’s side kick panel. closed and fully latched. Do this by trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to push the hood lid down, but open it and repeat the procedure. Note: Always check that the hood is closed correctly to prevent it from opening while the vehicle is travelling. Since the hood is equipped with a double locking system, one for each side, you must check that it is closed on both its side ends. 04196S0002B

04196S0001EM Release Hood Latch To The Left Warning! Hood Release Lever 5. Raise the hood completely. The 2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and operation is assisted by the addition of position yourself in front of the grille. two gas props which hold it in the open Be sure the hood is fully latched before position. driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully 3. Lift the hood slightly. latched, it could open when the vehicle is in Note: motion and block your vision. Failure to 4. Move the under-hood latch from right follow this warning could result in serious to left to release the hood. Do not tamper with the props and injury or death. assist the hood while lifting it. Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting, check that the windshield wiper arms are not raised from the windshield or in operation, that the vehicle is stationary and that the electric park brake is engaged.

51 TRUNK Opening From The Inside Pull the lever in the direction indicated by When unlocked, the trunk lid can be the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever The trunk unlocking is electrically can be seen in the dark. operated and is deactivated when the opened from inside the vehicle using the vehicle is in motion. interior trunk lid release button, located Closing under the dashboard near the engine Opening hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid Grip one of the handles and lower the trunk lid until it clicks. Opening From The Outside release button until you hear a “click.” When unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened from outside the vehicle using the exterior trunk lid release button located between the plate lights. Push the button until you hear a “click.” The trunk lid can also be opened by quickly pushing the exterior trunk lid release button on the key fob twice.

04206S0002EM 04206S0003EM Interior Trunk Lid Release Button Trunk Lid Interior Handles

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Trunk Lid Emergency Opening Note: A lever can be found in the trunk lid over It will not be possible to open the the lock to allow opening from the inside. trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid 04056S0005EM opening strap on the trunk lid lock Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button before disconnecting the battery. Refer The turn signal indicators will blink and to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing And the interior lights will turn on when the Maintenance” for the procedure. trunk lid is opened. They turn off automatically when the trunk lid is closed.

The lights turn off automatically after a 04206S0006EM few minutes if the trunk lid is left open. Emergency Release Button 52 Trunk Initialization INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Sun Visors Note: If the battery is disconnected or Glove Compartment The sun visors are located at the sides of the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid the interior rear view mirror. They can be opening/closing mechanism must be To open the glove compartment proceed adjusted forward and toward the side re-initialized as follows: as follows: window. 1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid. 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the To direct the visor toward the side glove compartment by placing the window, detach the visor from the 2. Push the lock button on the remote emergency key in the lock on the handle. interior rear view mirror side hook and control. turn it towards the side window. 3. Push the unlock button on the remote 2. Pull handle to open the glove compartment. From this position, the sun visor can also control. be extended toward to rear of the vehicle Trunk Specifications for additional blockage of sunlight. Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If Equipped Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back of the sun visors and can be There are four hooks inside the trunk for used even in poor light conditions. attaching the cargo net or cables which can safely secure the cargo.

04246S0001EM Opening The Glove Compartment When the glove compartment is opened, a light turns on to illuminate the inside of the compartment. 04246S0002EM Note: Do not insert large objects that Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger 04206S0005EM will prevent the glove compartment from Window Rear Cargo Tie-Downs closing completely. Always make sure Note: A rear facing child restraint Note: Do not apply a load greater than that the glove compartment is completely closed when driving. system should never be fitted in the front 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook. passenger seat. Always comply with the Cargo Net — If Equipped instructions on the sun visor. Refer to This is useful for correctly arranging the "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more cargo and/or for transporting light information. materials. 53 Homelink The following operation will delete the HomeLink system (keeping the manufacture’s standard codes and does Description programmable button pushed down). not need to be repeated during the Homelink is a fixed system installed on subsequent button programming: 2. If the indicator does not begin to flash the vehicle. It can sync up to three Push and hold the outer buttons quickly, change the distance between the different devices that activate garage HomeLink and the portable remote (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the doors, gates, lighting systems, and home control and try the procedure again. or office alarm systems. lighted indicators will start to flash. Release both buttons. 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first Programming slowly and then quickly. When the indicator starts to flash quickly, release both buttons. Warning! Using The Homelink System The HomeLink system activates the Vehicle exhaust contains carbon garage door or gate motor, just like the monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your portable remote control. The car must be vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious within the range of the garage door and injury or death. the ignition must be in the ON position. Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). Yourmotorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the 04246S0006NA While the signal is being transmitted, the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE universal transceiver. Do not program the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) indicator is lit and the system (garage transceiver if people, pets or other objects Buttons door, gate, etc.) will respond. are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 — Homelink Button 1 If the HomeLink system does not this transceiver with a garage door opener operate, the original portable remote that has a “stop and reverse” feature as 2 — Homelink Button 2 3 — Homelink Button 3 control may be equipped with an required by Federal safety standards. This alternative code (refer to “Alternative includes most garage door opener models 4 — Homelink Indicator manufactured after 1982. Do not use a Code Synchronization”). garage door opener without these safety If necessary, the original remote control features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Note: Follow the steps below to begin can still be used to operate the system. on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety programming your remote control to one information or assistance. of the HomeLink buttons: Alternative Code Synchronization To check whether the garage door or gate 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink motor has an alternative code, proceed Note: Without starting the engine, button (1, 2 or 3). as follows: activate the handbrake and place the When the HomeLink indicator begins to ignition in the ON position. flash slowly, move the portable remote 1. Read the garage door or gate motor control one to three inches from the manufacturer manual. 54 2. The portable remote control seems to handbrake and turn the ignition to ON, have programmed to the HomeLink without starting the engine. Warning! system, but the garage door or gate can Proceed as follows: be neither opened or closed. 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on 3. Push the programmed button and Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the garage door or gate motor. The color monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an and position may vary depending on the vehicle in the garage while programming the alternative code system, the indicator manufacturer (consult the garage door or transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious flashes briefly, and then remains off for gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” injury or death. two seconds. This sequence is repeated button (this normally activates the for 20 seconds. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and setting warning light). close while you are programming the 2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1, universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects Warning! 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator are in the path of the door or gate. Only use begins to flash slowly, move the portable this transceiver with a garage door opener remote control one to three inches from that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the HomeLink system (keeping the required by Federal safety standards. This monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your programmable button pushed down). includes most garage door opener models vehicle in the garage while programming the manufactured after 1982. Do not use a transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious 3. Within 30 seconds, push the garage door opener without these safety injury or death. programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Push the programmed button a second on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety Yourmotorized door or gate will open and information or assistance. close while you are programming the time and release it to conclude the universal transceiver. Do not program the operation. For some motors, the transceiver if people, pets or other objects operation will probably have to be Note: Activate the handbrake and place are in the path of the door or gate. Only use repeated a third time to end the setting. the ignition to ON without starting the this transceiver with a garage door opener The motor should now be capable of engine. that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This recognizing the signal transmitted by Proceed as follows: HomeLink and then open/close the door includes most garage door opener models 1. Push the desired HomeLink button manufactured after 1982. Do not use a or gate. and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not garage door opener without these safety Programming A Single Key features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, release the button until the last on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety It is possible to program another original operation has been performed. information or assistance. remote control on an already programmed HomeLink key by canceling the previously stored frequency. Note: To program Homelink using an Alternative Code, the car must be within range of the garage door. Activate the 55 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins Technical Information For After Sales Center Console to flash slowly, move the portable remote Service The center console storage compartment control 1 to 3 inches from the system If you are unable to set up HomeLink is located between the front seats. (keeping the programmable button successfully after following the above To access the center console storage, lift pressed down). instructions, contact After Sales Service the upper part of the center console as (HomeLink free hotline number If the indicator does not begin to flash shown below. quickly, change the distance between the 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following HomeLink and the portable remote information: control and try the procedure again. Vehicle make and model, including The HomeLink indicator flashes, first manufacturing year and country of slowly and then quickly. When the purchase; indicator starts to flash quickly, release Make, model, age and frequency of use both buttons on the remote control. of the original portable remote control (if The system previously programmed to known). HomeLink has now been deleted and the General Information new system is ready to use. This does not The following regulatory statement affect the other two HomeLink buttons in applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) 04246S0004EM any way. devices equipped in this vehicle: Center Console Deleting Programmed Keys This device complies with Part 15 of the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE It is recommended to delete HomeLink FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Warning! programming before selling the car. license-exempt RSS standard(s). All three keys are deleted Operation is subject to the following two simultaneously. conditions: Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving Proceed as follows: 1. This device may not cause harmful with the console compartment lid open may interference, and 1. Push and hold the outer buttons result in injury in a collision. (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the 2. This device must accept any indicator will start to flash. interference received, including interference that may cause undesired 2. Release both keys. operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 56 Cupholder ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION Two cupholders are available in the SYSTEMS center console. The following systems are used for reducing engine emissions: Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensors Evaporation Control System

04246S0005EM Cupholders In Center Console 1— Cover

To access the cupholders, slide the cover forward. To close the compartment, push the cover and it will close automatically.

57 This page is intentionally left blank

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .60 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .62 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL .....67 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .88 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ...... 88

59 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster

05026S0005EM Instrument Cluster 1.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light 3. Instrument Cluster Display 4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Fuel Door Location) 5. (Speed Indicator)

60 Tachometer Under normal usage, the temperature Note: If the low fuel warning light turns should remain around the middle of the on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel The Tachometer indicates the engine digital scale according to the working station. Revolutions Per Minute (Giri). conditions. Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting The warning light will turn on to signal Caution! (Brightness Sensor) the excessive increase of the engine oil Inside the Tachometer there is a light temperature. sensor capable of detecting light and In the event of excessive engine oil Do not travel with the fuel tank almost adjusting the brightness of the temperature, stop the engine empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage instrument panel and the Information and immediately and contact an authorized the catalytic converter. Entertainment System display. dealer. Speedometer Engine Oil Temperature Gauge Fuel Level Gauge The speedometer shows the vehicle The digital indicator monitors the The digital monitors the speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers temperature of the engine oil and starts amount of fuel in the tank. per hour (mph/km/h). supplying indications when the oil When the warning light turns on, a temperature reaches approximately message is displayed, and a chime is 122° F (50°C). sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.

61 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0001QV Instrument Cluster Display

62 Reconfigurable Display Items 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Depending on the driving mode chosen using the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural, 1. Headlight Warning Lights Shows information regarding the Speed Limiter function. and Advanced Efficiency, the screens can Displays the headlight warning light for be graphically different. Navigation either of the following active modes: 5. Compass instructions and call information can be set and displayed in the Information and Headlights 6. Reconfigurable Main Area Entertainment System. Automatic Headlights Can display the following screens: Home Home 2. Gear Selector Information The parameters shown on the display, for Displays the following information Trip A the modes: Dynamic, Natural and controlled by the gear selector function: Trip B (can be activated/deactivated Advanced Efficiency are: P = PARK through the Information and Time Entertainment System) R = REVERSE Outside Temperature Performance N = NEUTRAL Current Speed (shown if the repeat The screens can be selected, on rotation, modes of the Phone and Navigation D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) by pushing the MENU selection button on functions are not active) AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in the windshield wiper stalk. Range manual (sequential) driving mode – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode

3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Displays operations for the following modes: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If 05036S0002EM MENU Selection/Reset Button 05036S0004NA Equipped Instrument Cluster Display Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped

63 efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption. Advanced Efficiency

05036S0007NA 05036S0055NA Instrument Cluster Display Instrument Cluster Display To reset the values, press and hold down Trip A And B the button on the windshield wiper stalk. For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, Performance 05036S0011NA and Advanced Efficiency) and with the Dynamic Driving Style The displayed parameters differ ignition device ON, the "" The three central icons on the screen according to the active mode. The modes can be used to display the measurements indicate the effectiveness of the driving which can be selected using the Alfa DNA regarding the operating state of the style, linked to the following parameters: system are: vehicle. This function is characterized by acceleration, deceleration and gear two separate records, called “Trip A”and Natural shifts, with a view to limiting “Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by consumption. The bar below the icons Information and Entertainment System), shows current consumption and the where the “complete missions” (journeys) green line represents the optimal area. are recorded in a reciprocally The globe lights up gradually according to independent manner. lower consumption. “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display Dynamic GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the values relating to: Distance travelled Average fuel consumption

Average speed 05036S0009NA Active trip Efficiency Consumption Graph Fuel consumption indicator The screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the 64 9. Multiple settings can be programmed by Indicates the total miles travelled. the user using the Information and Entertainment System. This section U.S. Federal regulations require that describes only the basic settings: upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct Units & Language mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Time&Date If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should Cluster leave the odometer reading the same as To access the settings list in the it was before the repair or service. If s/he Information and Entertainment System, 05036S0013NA cannot do so, then the odometer must be Acceleration Gauge proceed as follows: set at zero, and a sticker must be placed 1. Press the MENU button to access the The displayed parameters are related to in the door jamb stating what the mileage main menu. was before the repair or service. It is a vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the Select “Settings” from the main menu trend of the longitudinal/lateral good idea for you to make a record of the using the Rotary Knob. accelerations (G-meter information), odometer reading before the considering gravity acceleration as a repair/service, so that you can be sure reference unit. that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer Lateral acceleration peaks are also must be reset at zero. indicated. PARAMETERS SET BY USER 7. Vehicle Range Indicates the miles left before the fuel tank is empty. Displays the position by indicating the cardinal direction. 05036S0040EM MENU button 8. Failure Warning Lights Area dedicated to displaying failures, the following symbols could be displayed on 05036S0015EM rotation: Information And Entertainment System Low criticality symbols (yellow amber) High criticality symbols (red) 65 Units & Language Clock & Date Cluster

05036S0016EM 05036S0017EM 05036S0018EM Units & Language Selectable Menu Clock & Date Selectable Menu Options Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Options Menu Options The following settings can be modified The following settings can be modified under the “Clock & Date” menu: The following settings can be modified under the “Units & Language” menu: under the “Cluster” menu: Sync With GPS Time: activates or Measure Units: select US, metric, or deactivates the clock synchronization Warning volume: set the custom. The custom option allows for through the GPS. If the function is volume of the warning buzzer individual selection of the unit measures deactivated, the options Set Time and Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip Set Date are enabled Language: change the language of the function system Set Time: set the time manually Phone repeat: activate or deactivate Restore Settings: restores the factory Time Format: set the time format to repeating the Phone function screens on settings either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock) the instrument cluster display To access and change the setting, turn Set Date: set the date manually Restore Settings: restores the factory and push the Rotary Pad. settings GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad. To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.

66 WARNING LIGHTS AND precautionary and as such must not be faults. Serious faults are indicated by a MESSAGES ON THE considered as exhaustive and/or repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” INSTRUMENT PANEL alternative to the information contained Less serious faults are indicated by a in the Owner’s Manual, which you are warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. The following pages consist of warning advised to read carefully in all cases. Youcan stop the warning cycle in both lights and messages. Always refer to the information in this cases by pushing the button located on Note: section in the event of a failure the windshield wiper stalk. The indication. instrument panel warning light will stay The warning light turns on together on until the cause of the failure is The failure indicators appearing on with a dedicated message and/or chime eliminated. when applicable. These indications are the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ON This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to If the light remains on when the parking brake has been have the system checked as soon as possible. disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the Release the electric park brake, then check that the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake warning light has turned off. hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

67 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately. either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly. AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. dealer.

68 Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not possible. on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

69 Warning What It Means What To Do Light TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have guaranteed. the tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

Each tire, including the spare (if them to the proper pressure. Driving on a detects a malfunction, the telltale will provided), should be checked monthly significantly under-inflated tire causes flash for approximately one minute and when cold and inflated to the inflation the tire to overheat and can lead to tire then remain continuously illuminated. pressure recommended by the vehicle failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel This sequence will continue upon manufacturer on the vehicle placard or efficiency and tire tread life, and may subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as tire inflation pressure label. (If your affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping the malfunction exists. When the vehicle has tires of a different size than ability. malfunction indicator is illuminated, the the size indicated on the vehicle placard Please note that the TPMS is not a system may not be able to detect or or tire inflation pressure label, you should substitute for proper tire maintenance, signal low tire pressure as intended. determine the proper tire inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to TPMS malfunctions may occur for a pressure for those tires.) maintain correct tire pressure, even if variety of reasons, including the As an added safety feature, your vehicle under-inflation has not reached the level installation of replacement or alternate has been equipped with a Tire Pressure to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tires or wheels on the vehicle that Monitoring System (TPMS) that tire pressure telltale. prevent the TPMS from functioning GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Yourvehicle has also been equipped with properly. Always check the TPMS when one or more of your tires is a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate malfunction telltale after replacing one significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the system is not operating or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to when the low tire pressure telltale properly. The TPMS malfunction ensure that the replacement or alternate illuminates, you should stop and check indicator is combined with the low tire tires and wheels allow the TPMS to your tires as soon as possible and inflate pressure telltale. When the system continue to function properly.

70 Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there. duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

71 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution! GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

72 Warning Light What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) — IF EQUIPPED Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled. FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) Refuel the vehicle. illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

73 Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position. LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed. RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

74 Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

75 Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The turning on of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System.

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

76 Symbol What It Means What To Do In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, fill with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURETOO HIGH telltale comes on when the engine is started again. The telltale lights up when the engine has overheated. If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. FAILURE If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. Note: Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the other, and then turn in back to the central position. DOOR OPEN The telltale turns on when one or more doors are not Close the doors properly. completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the car moving.

77 Symbol What It Means What To Do HOOD CAP NOT PROPERLYSHUT The telltale turns on when the hood cap is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the hood properly. open hood cap appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and the vehicle is moving. TRUNK LID NOT PROPERLYSHUT The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the trunk lid properly. open trunk lid appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Caution! AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely The telltale turns on, together with a buzzer warning, to damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty. may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

Symbol What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC CONTROL (ETC) WARNING

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTS Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This warning light, along with the related message, signals a failure in the Electronic Throttle Control system (ETC).

78 Symbol What It Means What To Do Place the gear selector in the P (Park) position and the ignition in the off position: the warning light should switch If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on while the off. If the warning light stays on with engine running, the engine is running. vehicle can still be driven. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated. If the warning light flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have performance, irregular/high idling speed or engine the failure eliminated. stopping might take place and the vehicle may need to be towed.

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVEL The telltale turns on, along with the related message on Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. the display, to indicate low engine oil level.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The switching on of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The switching on of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. corresponds to an alternator failure.

79 Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system. Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature falls to or below 37°F (3°C).

80 Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.

81 Symbol What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.

82 Symbol What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Lane Departure Warning system. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights.

83 Symbol What It Means What To Do AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling. case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

84 Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use genuine parts or similar because the reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.

GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive the failure eliminated. system failure.

85 Symbol What It Means What To Do

ADAPTIVE FRONT-LIGHTING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. in “Technical Specifications.” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

86 Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

87 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system. components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration. service technicians may need to access For states that require It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak an Inspection and diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the “Warning Lights And Messages” “Malfunction Indicator paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL)” is The aim of the OBD system (Onboard functioning and is not Diagnostic) is to: on when the engine is running, and that ONLYan authorized service technician the OBD II system is ready for testing. Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. Indicate an increase in emissions connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle. The OBD II system may not be ready if Indicate the need to replace damaged your vehicle was recently serviced, components If unauthorized equipment is connected to recently had a dead battery or a battery the OBD II connection port, such as a replacement. If the OBD II system should driver-behavior tracking device, it may: The vehicle also has a connector, which be determined not ready for the I/M test, can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, your vehicle may fail the test. makes it possible to read the error codes including safety related systems, could be Yourvehicle has a simple ignition stored in the electronic control units impaired or a loss of vehicle control could together with a series of specific occur that may result in an accident actuated test, which you can use prior to parameters for engine operation and involving serious injury or death. going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL diagnosis. This check can be carried out Access, or allow others to access, must do the following: by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems, Note: After eliminating a fault, to check including personal information. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON the system completely, your authorized position, but do not crank or start the dealer is obliged to run tests and, if engine. necessary certain road tests. Note: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

88 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition If your OBD II system is not ready, you switch to the ON position, you will see the should see an authorized dealer or repair “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” facility. If your vehicle was recently symbol come on as part of a normal bulb serviced or had a battery failure or check. replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one normally would in order for your OBD II of two things will happen: system to update. A recheck with the The MIL will flash for about ten above test routine may then indicate that seconds and then return to being fully the system is now ready. illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition Regardless of whether your vehicle's or start the engine. This means that your OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and illuminated during normal vehicle you should not proceed to the I/M operation you should have your vehicle station. serviced before going to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will The I/M station can fail your vehicle remain fully illuminated until you place because the MIL is on with the engine the ignition in the off position or start the running. engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

89 This page is intentionally left blank

90 SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 92 the safety systems that your vehicle may AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....95 be equipped with, and provides OCCUPANT RESTRAINT instructions on how to use them SYSTEMS ...... 104 correctly. SAFETYTIPS ...... 129

91 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The Electronic Braking Force Distribution The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws The vehicle may be equipped with the (EBD) system works with the ABS, of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor following active safety devices: allowing the brake force to be distributed can it increase braking or steering efficiency between the front and rear wheels. beyond that afforded by the condition of the Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System vehicle brakes and tires or the traction SAFETY Drive Train Control (DTC) System System Intervention afforded. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ABS equipped on this vehicle is provided with the "Brake-by-wire" The ABS cannot prevent collisions, System including those resulting from excessive (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. speed in turns, following another vehicle too Traction Control System (TCS) With this system, the command given by closely, or hydroplaning. Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System pressing the brake pedal is not The capabilities of an ABS equipped Hill Start Assist (HSA) System transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) or dangerous manner that could jeopardize on the pedal with the traditional system the user’s safety or the safety of others. System is no longer noticeable. For the operation of the systems, see the Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If following pages. Warning! Equipped Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Some models of this vehicle are equipped An integral part of the braking system, with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD), the ABS prevents one or more wheels The ABS contains sophisticated which offers an optimal drive for from locking and slipping in all road electronic equipment that may be countless driving conditions and road surface conditions, regardless of the susceptible to interference caused by surfaces. The system reduces the improperly installed or high output radio intensity of the braking action. The transmitting equipment. This interference slipping of the tires to a minimum, system ensures that the vehicle can be can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking automatically redistributing the torque controlled even during emergency capability. Installation of such equipment to the front and rear wheels as needed. braking, allowing the driver to optimize should be performed by qualified To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with stopping distances. professionals. AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel The system intervenes during braking Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will drive (RWD) when the road and when the wheels are about to lock, diminish their effectiveness and may lead to environmental conditions are such that typically in emergency braking or a collision. Pumping makes the stopping they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. low-grip conditions where locking may be distance longer. Just press firmly on your When the road and environmental more frequent. brake pedal when you need to slow down or conditions require better traction, the stop. The system also improves control and vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode. stability of the vehicle when braking on a surface where the grip of the left and right wheels varies, such as in a corner. 92 The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is shown System Intervention system can increase the risk of loss of on the instrument cluster display. The intervention of the system is vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal Note: If the system failure symbol indicated by the flashing of the ESC injury and death. switches on, after starting the engine or warning light on the instrument panel, to while driving, it means that the AWD inform the driver that the vehicle Traction Control System (TCS) system is not working properly. If the stability and grip are critical. warning message activates frequently, it The system automatically operates in the is recommended to carry out the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on maintenance operations. Warning! one or both drive wheels on roads that Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending System Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot on the slipping conditions, two different The ESC system improves the directional prevent the natural laws of physics from control systems are activated: control and stability of the vehicle in acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the If the slipping involves both drive various driving conditions. traction afforded by prevailing road wheels, the system intervenes, reducing conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s including those resulting from excessive the power transmitted by the engine. understeer and oversteer, distributing speed in turns, driving on very slippery If the slipping only involves one of the the brake force on the appropriate surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot drive wheels, the Brake Limited wheels. The torque supplied by the prevent accidents resulting from loss of engine can also be reduced in order to vehicle control due to inappropriate driver Differential (BLD) function is activated, maintain control of the vehicle. input for the conditions. Only a safe, automatically braking the wheel which is The ESC system uses sensors installed attentive, and skillful driver can prevent slipping (the behavior of a self-locking accidents. The capabilities of an ESC on the vehicle to determine the path that differential is simulated). This will equipped vehicle must never be exploited in increase the engine torque transferred to the driver intends to follow and a reckless or dangerous manner which could compares it with the vehicle’s effective jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of the wheel which isn't slipping. path. When the real path deviates from others. the desired path, the ESC system System Intervention Vehicle modifications, or failure to The intervention of the system is intervenes to counter the vehicle’s properly maintain your vehicle, may change understeer or oversteer. the handling characteristics of your vehicle, indicated by the flashing of the ESC Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is and may negatively affect the performance warning light on the instrument panel, to turning more than it should according to of the ESC system. Changes to the steering inform the driver that the vehicle stability and grip are critical. the angle of the steering wheel. system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely Understeer occurs when the vehicle is affect ESC performance. Improperly Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System turning less than it should according to inflated and unevenly worn tires may also The PBA system is designed to improve the angle of the steering wheel. degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle the vehicle’s braking capacity during modification or poor vehicle maintenance emergency braking. that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC 93 The system detects emergency braking Hill Start Assist (HSA) System by monitoring the speed and force with This is an integral part of the ESC system Warning! which the brake pedal is pressed, and and facilitates starting on slopes, consequently applies the optimal brake activating automatically in the following pressure. This can reduce the braking There may be situations where the Hill Start

SAFETY cases: distance: the PBA system therefore Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight complements the ABS. rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a gradient higher than 5%, engine with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a Maximum assistance from the PBA running, brake pressed and transmission system is obtained by pressing the brake trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than driving involvement. It is always the driver’s pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake REVERSE (R) engaged. responsibility to be attentive to distance to pedal should be pressed continuously other vehicles, people, and objects, and most during braking, avoiding intermittent Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road importantly brake operation to ensure safe presses, to get the most out of the with a gradient higher than 5%, engine operation of the vehicle under all road system. Do not reduce pressure on the running, brake pressed and reverse gear conditions. Yourcomplete attention is brake pedal until braking is no longer engaged. always required while driving to maintain necessary. safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow When setting off, the ESC system control these warnings can result in a collision or The PBA system is deactivated when the unit maintains the braking pressure on serious personal injury. brake pedal is released. the wheels until the engine torque necessary for starting is reached, or in Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System Warning! any case for a maximum of two seconds, The DST function uses the integration of allowing your right foot to be moved the ESC system with the electric power easily from the brake pedal to the steering to increase the safety level of The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent accelerator. the natural laws of physics from acting on the whole vehicle. The system will automatically deactivate the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction In critical situations (braking on surfaces after two seconds without starting, afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA with different grip conditions), the ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those gradually releasing the braking pressure. system controls the steering through the resulting from excessive speed in turns, During this release stage, it is possible to DST function to implement an additional driving on very slippery surfaces, or hear a typical mechanical brake release torque contribution on the steering wheel hydroplaning. The capabilities of a noise, indicating the imminent movement in order to suggest the most correct PBA-equipped vehicle must never be of the vehicle. exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, maneuver to the driver. which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

94 The coordinated action of the brakes and AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS mirror on the side in which the other steering increases the sensation of The following auxiliary driving systems vehicle was detected. safety and control of the vehicle. are available in this vehicle: Note: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If of action through small torques on the Equipped steering wheel, which means the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If effectiveness of the DST feature is highly Equipped dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It Tire Pressure Monitoring System is very important to realize that this (TPMS) feature will not steer the vehicle, Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System meaning the driver is still responsible for — If Equipped steering the vehicle. 06016S0002EM The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system BSM Indicator Light uses two radar sensors, located in the When the engine is started the warning rear bumper (one for each side), to detect light turns on to signal the driver that the the presence of other vehicles in the rear system is active. side blind spots of your vehicle. Sensors The sensors are activated when any forward gear is engaged at a speed higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged. The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the vehicle is in PARK. The detection area of the system covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle. This area begins from the door mirror and 06016S0001B Rear Sensor Location extends for 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear part of the vehicle. The system warns the driver about the When the sensors are active, the system presence of other vehicles in the monitors the detection areas on both sides detection area by illuminating the of the vehicle and warns the driver about warning light located within the door the possible presence of vehicles in these areas. 95 While driving, the system monitors the Rear View Note: detection area from three different The system detects vehicles coming from If the sensors are covered by objects points (side, rear and front) to check the rear part of your vehicle on both sides or vehicles, the system will not warn the whether an alert needs to be sent to the and entering the rear detection area with driver. driver. The system can detect the

SAFETY a difference in speed of less than 31 mph presence of a vehicle in one of these (50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle. For the system to operate correctly, three areas. the rear bumper area where the radar Overtaking Vehicles sensors are located must stay free from Note: If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, snow, ice and dirt gathered from the The system does not alert the driver with a difference in speed of less than road surface. for the presence of fixed object (e.g. 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in the blind spot for approximately Do not cover the rear bumper area safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). where the radar sensors are located with However, in some circumstances, the 1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door mirror of the corresponding side any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, system may activate in the presence of etc.). these objects. This is normal and does illuminates. not indicate a system malfunction. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph The system does not alert the driver Warning! (25 km/h), the warning light will not about the presence of vehicles coming illuminate. from the opposite direction, in the Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a adjacent lanes. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) back up aid system. It is intended to be used System to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in This system helps the driver during a parking lot situation. Drivers must be Warning! reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced careful when backing up, even when using visibility. RCP.Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check The RCP system monitors the rear for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an detection areas on both sides of the aid to help detect objects in the blind spot obstructions, and blind spots before backing zones. The BSM system is not designed to vehicle to detect objects moving towards up. Failure to do so can result in serious detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum injury or death. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and BSM system, always check your vehicle’s 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in your turn signal before changing lanes. areas such as parking lots. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or The system activation is signaled to the death. driver by an audible warning.

96 Operating Mode General Information The system may be activated/ This vehicle has systems that operate on deactivated via the Information and radio frequency that comply with Part Entertainment System. To access the 15 of the Federal Communications function, select the following items on Commission (FCC) rules and with the main menu in sequence: Industry Canada Standards RSS- 1. “Settings.” GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two 2. “Safety.” conditions: 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” 1. The device may not cause harmful 06016S0003B "Blind Spot Alert” Visual Mode interference. Front Bumper Radar Location When the system is enabled, the warning 2. The device must accept any light within the door mirror on the side of interference received, including the detected object illuminates. interference that may cause undesired The visual warning on the mirror will blink operation of the device. if the driver activates the turn signals, Changes or modifications to any of these indicating a lane change. systems by other than an authorized The warning will be fixed if the driver service facility could void authorization stays in the same lane. to use this equipment. "Blind Spot Alert" Function Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Deactivation System — If Equipped When the system is deactivated ("Blind This is a driving assistance system which Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP 06016S0004B comprises a radar located behind the systems will not emit an audible or a Windshield Camera Location front bumper and a camera located in the visual warning. central part of the windshield. In the event of an imminent collision, the The BSM system will store the operating system intervenes by automatically mode running when the engine was braking the vehicle to prevent the stopped. Each time the engine is started, collision or reduce its effects. the operating mode stored previously will The system provides the driver with be recalled and used. audible and visual signals through dedicated messages on the instrument cluster display. The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if a potential front end collision is 97 detected (limited braking). Signals and Engagement/Disengagement Activation/Deactivation limited braking are intended to allow the The following functions can be selected The Forward Collision Warning system is driver time to intervene. in sequence using the Information and activated whenever the engine is started In situations with the risk of collision, if Entertainment System: regardless of what is shown on the

SAFETY the system detects no intervention by Information and Entertainment System. 1. “Settings.” the driver, it provides automatic braking Following a deactivation, the system will to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the 2. “Safety.” not warn the driver about the possible potential front end collision (automatic collision with the preceding vehicle, braking). If intervention by the driver on 3. “Forward Collision Warning.” regardless of the setting selected with the brake pedal is detected, but not 4. “Mode.” the Information and Entertainment deemed sufficient, the system may System. intervene in order to improve the Select from among three operating modes: Note: Each time the engine is started, reaction of the braking system by the system is activated regardless of reducing vehicle speed further Warning And Brake: the system (if what setting was selected when the (additional assistance in braking stage). active), in addition to the visual and engine was turned OFF The system will intervene automatically audible warnings, provides limited The system is active: in case of imminent collision or impact braking, automatic braking, and against a pedestrian crossing the road additional assistance in braking stage Each time the engine is started. (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)). where the driver does not brake In the Information and Entertainment Note: For safety reasons, when the sufficiently in the event of a potential System. vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers front end collision. When the ignition is in the ON position. may remain blocked for about two Only Warning: the system (if active), seconds. Make sure to press the brake does not provide limited braking, but The vehicle speed is between 4 mph pedal if the vehicle moves slightly guarantees automatic braking or (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). forward. additional assistance in braking stage When the front seat belts are where the driver does not brake at all or fastened. not sufficiently enough in the event of a Warning! potential front end collision. Changing The System Sensitivity The sensitivity of the system can be Disabled: the system does not provide changed through the Information and Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not visual and audible warnings, limited Entertainment System menu, choosing intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor braking, automatic braking, or additional can FCW detect every type of potential from one of the following three options: assistance in braking stage. The system "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the collision. The driver has the responsibility to will therefore provide no indication of a avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via description in the “Information and braking and steering. Failure to follow this possible collision. Entertainment System Supplement” for warning could lead to serious injury or death. how to change the settings. 98 The default setting is "Med". With this Although the vehicle can still be driven in In certain cases, this dedicated message setting, the system warns the driver of a normal conditions, the system may be not could be displayed when the radar is not possible collision with the vehicle in front completely available. detecting any vehicles or objects within when that vehicle is at a standard When the conditions limiting the system its view range. distance, between that of the other two functions end, this will go back to normal If atmospheric conditions are not the settings. and complete operation. Should the fault reason behind this message, check if the With the system sensitivity set to "Far", persist, contact your authorized dealer. sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to the system will warn the driver of a System Failure Signaling clean or remove any obstructions in the possible collision with the vehicle in front If the system turns off and a dedicated area. when that vehicle is at a greater distance, message is shown on the display, it If the message appears frequently, even thus providing the possibility of acting on means that there is a fault with the in the absence of atmospheric conditions the brakes more lightly and gradually. system. such as snow, rain, mud or other This setting provides the drivers with the In this case, it is still possible to drive the obstructions, contact your authorized maximum possible reaction time to dealer for a sensor alignment check. prevent a potential collision. vehicle, but you are advised to contact you authorized dealer as soon as In the absence of visible obstructions, With the option set to "Near", the system possible. manually removing the decorative cover will alert the driver of a possible collision Radar Indication Not Available trim and cleaning the radar surface could with the vehicle in front when that vehicle be required. Have this operation is close. This setting offers the driver a If conditions are such that the radar performed at your authorized dealer. lower reaction time compared to the cannot detect obstacles correctly, the system is deactivated and a dedicated Note: It is recommended that you do not "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a install devices, accessories, or potential collision, but permits more message appears on the display. This generally occurs in the event of poor aerodynamic attachments in front of the dynamic driving of the vehicle. sensor or darken it in any way, as this can The system sensitivity setting is kept in visibility, such as when it is snowing or raining heavily. compromise the correct functioning of the memory when the engine is turned the system. The function of this system can also be OFF. Frontal Collision Alarm With Active System Limited Operation Signal temporarily reduced due to obstructions such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Braking If a dedicated message is displayed, a such cases, a dedicated message will be If this function is selected, the brakes are condition limiting the system operation shown on the display and the system will operated to reduce the speed of the may have occurred. The possible reasons be deactivated. This message can vehicle in the event of potential collision. of this limitation are if something is sometimes appear in conditions of high This function applies an additional blocking the camera view, or a fault is reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective braking pressure if the braking pressure present. tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions applied by the driver does not suffice to If an obstruction is signaled, clean the limiting the system functions end, it will prevent potential collision. area of the windshield. go back to normal and complete The function is active with speed above operation. 4 mph (7 km/h). 99 Driving In Special Conditions Driving Close To A Bend Vehicles With Small Dimensions In certain driving conditions, system When entering or leaving a wide bend, the And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane intervention might be unexpected or system may detect a vehicle in front you, The system cannot detect vehicles in delayed. The driver must therefore be but not in the same driving lane. In cases front of you but outside the range of the

SAFETY very careful, keeping control of the such as these, the system may intervene. radar sensor and may therefore not react vehicle. in the presence of small vehicles, such as bicycles or motorcycles. Driving close to a bend. The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout. Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane. Lane change by other vehicles. Vehicles traveling at right angles to the

vehicle. 06016S0005EM Note: In particularly complex traffic Driving Around Wide Curves conditions, the driver can deactivate the The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A 06016S0006EM Driving Near Small Vehicles system manually through the Information Roundabout and Entertainment System. On a roundabout, the system could intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead which is leaving the roundabout.

06016S0010EM Driving In Roundabouts 100 Lane Change By Other Vehicles Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter Warning! the same lane as your vehicle within the GEN/210/220/310. operating range of the radar sensor, may Operation is subject to the following two cause the system to intervene. The system has not been designed to conditions: prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in 1. The device may not cause harmful advance. Failure to take into account this interference. warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. 2. The device must accept any The system may activate, assessing the interference received, including trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of interference that may cause undesired reflecting metal objects different from operation of the device. other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, Changes or modifications to any of these level crossings, gates, railways, objects near systems by other than an authorized road constructions sites or higher than the service facility could void authorization vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the to use this equipment. 06016S0007EM system may intervene inside multi-story Other Vehicles Changing Lanes parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on Tire Pressure Monitoring System Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To the road surface. These possible activations (TPMS) The Vehicle are a consequence of the real driving This vehicle is equipped with a Tire scenario coverage by the system and must The system may temporarily react to a not be regarded as faults. Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that vehicle that is passing through the radar sends the inflation pressure information sensor’s operating range at right angles. The system has been designed for road of each tire to the control unit, and will use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, signal the driver in the event of the system must be deactivated to avoid insufficient tire pressure. unnecessary warnings. Automatic deactivation is signaled by the dedicated Tire pressure will vary with temperature warning light/symbol switching on in the by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every instrument panel (refer to the instructions in 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the the "Warning Lights And Messages On The outside temperature decreases, the tire Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure Instrument Panel" for further information). should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as General Information the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or 06016S0008EM This vehicle has systems that operate on driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar radio frequency that comply with Part three hour period. The cold tire inflation Range 15 of the Federal Communications 101 pressure must not exceed the maximum 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire Using aftermarket tire sealants may inflation pressure molded into the tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After And Maintenance” for information on decrease the tire pressure to using an aftermarket tire sealant it is how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire recommended that you take your vehicle to SAFETY The tire pressure will also increase as the pressure is low enough to turn on the your authorized dealer to have your sensor vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” function checked. should be no adjustment for this Driving the vehicle may cause the tire After inspecting or adjusting the tire increased pressure. pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi pressure always reinstall the valve stem The TPMS will signal the driver if (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from pressure falls below the warning limit for Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. entering the valve stem, which could any reason, including the effects of low In this situation, the “Tire Pressure damage the TPMS sensor. temperature and normal loss of pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off from the tire. only after the tires are inflated to the INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSURE The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient vehicle’s recommended cold placard INDICATION pressure value. tire pressure when pressure is equal to or If an insufficient pressure value is greater than the prescribed cold inflation detected on one or more tires, the level. Therefore, if insufficient tire Caution! warning light in the instrument cluster pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning will display alongside the dedicated light displaying in the instrument cluster, messages, the system will highlight the increase the inflation pressure up to the The TPMS has been optimized for the tire or tires with insufficient pressure prescribed cold inflation value. original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS graphically, and an acoustic signal will be pressures and warning have been The system will automatically update, established for the tire size equipped on emitted. and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale your vehicle. Undesirable system operation In this case, stop the vehicle, check the Light” will turn off once the system or sensor damage may result when using inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate receives the updated tire pressures. The replacement equipment that is not of the the necessary tire or tires to the correct vehicle may need to be driven for up to same size, type, and/or style. The TPM cold inflation pressure value, shown on 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in sensor is not designed for use on the display or in the dedicated TPMS order for the TPMS to receive this aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a menu. information. poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use Operating Example OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature For example, your vehicle may have a operation. recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 102 TPMS TEMPORARILYDISABLED TPMS Deactivation values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM TPMS Check Message The TPMS can be deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire SYSTEM" message will no longer be When a system fault is detected, the “Tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and displayed, as long as no system fault Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will tire assemblies that do not have TPMS exists. flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then Sensors, such as when installing winter remain on solid. The system fault will also Note: wheel and tire assemblies on your sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, vehicle. The TPMS is not intended to replace this sequence will repeat, provided that normal tire care and maintenance, or to the system fault still exists. The “Tire To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road provide warning of a tire failure or Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will condition. turn off when the fault condition no tires) with tires not equipped with Tire longer exists. A system fault can occur Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. The TPMS should not be used as a due to any of the following: Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes tire pressure gauge while adjusting your above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will tire pressure. Jamming due to electronic devices or chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash driving next to facilities emitting the on and off for 75 seconds and then Driving on a significantly same radio frequencies as the TPMS remain on. The instrument cluster will underinflated tire will cause the tire to sensors. display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” overheat, and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel Installing some form of aftermarket message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. efficiency and tire tread life, and may window tinting that affects radio wave affect the vehicle’s handling and Beginning with the next ignition switch signals. stopping ability. cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or Accumulation of snow or ice around display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” The TPMS is not a substitute for the wheels or wheel housings. message in the instrument cluster. proper tire maintenance, and it is the Using tire chains on the vehicle. Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of driver’s responsibility to maintain the pressure values. correct tire pressure using an accurate Using wheels/tires not equipped with tire pressure gauge, even if TPMS sensors. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) underinflation has not reached the level After the punctured tire has been with tires equipped with TPM sensors. to trigger illumination of the “Tire repaired with the original tire sealant Then, drive the vehicle for up to Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”. contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The Seasonal temperature changes will previous condition must be restored so TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will that the warning light is off during will flash on and off for 75 seconds and monitor the actual tire pressure in the normal driving. then turn off. The instrument cluster will tire. display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure 103 General Information OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in SYSTEMS a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in The following regulatory statement the front passenger seat, move the seat applies to all radio frequency (RF) Some of the most important safety as far back as possible and use the devices equipped in this vehicle: features in your vehicle are the restraint proper child restraint (refer to “Child SAFETY This device complies with Part 15 of the systems: Restraints” in this section for further FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Occupant Restraint Systems Features information). Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Seat Belt Systems 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer (1) This device may not cause harmful Supplemental Restraint Systems to “Child Restraints” in this section for interference. (SRS) Air Bags further information) should be secured in (2) This device must accept any Child Restraints a vehicle with a rear seat in child interference received, including restraints or belt-positioning booster interference that may cause undesired Some of the safety features described in seats. Older children who do not use child operation. this section may be standard equipment restraints or belt-positioning booster Note: Changes or modifications not on some models, or may be optional seats should ride properly buckled up in a expressly approved by the party equipment on others. If you are not sure, vehicle with a rear seat. responsible for compliance could void the ask your authorized dealer. 4. Never allow children to slide the user’s authority to operate the Important Safety Precautions equipment. shoulder belt behind them or under their Please pay close attention to the arm. information in this section. It tells you 5. Youshould read the instructions how to use your restraint system provided with your child restraint to properly, to keep you and your make sure that you are using it properly. passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take 6. All occupants should always wear to minimize the risk of harm from a their lap and shoulder belts properly. deploying air bag: 7. The driver and front passenger seats 1. Children 12 years old and under should be moved back as far as practical should always ride buckled up in a vehicle to allow the front air bags room to inflate. with a rear seat. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured. 104 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder BeltAlert Warning Sequence needs to be modified to accommodate a System (BeltAlert) The BeltAlert warning sequence is disabled person, refer to the “Customer activated when the vehicle is moving Assistance” section for customer service Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if above a specified vehicle speed range contact information. equipped) – No Deactivation and the driver or outboard front seat BeltAlert is a feature intended to passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with remind the driver and outboard front outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Warning! seat passenger (if equipped with (the outboard front passenger seat outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) BeltAlert is not active when the outboard to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert front passenger seat is unoccupied). The Never place a rear-facing child restraint in feature is active whenever the ignition BeltAlert warning sequence starts by front of an air bag. A deploying passenger switch is in the START or ON/RUN blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and front air bag can cause death or serious position. sounding an intermittent chime. Once the injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child Initial Indication BeltAlert warning sequence has restraint. completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light If the driver is unbuckled when the will remain on until the seat belts are Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ignition switch is first in the START or buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence vehicle with a rear seat. ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a may repeat based on vehicle speed until few seconds. If the driver or outboard the driver and occupied outboard front Seat Belt Systems front seat passenger (if equipped with seat passenger seat belts are buckled. outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) The driver should instruct all occupants Buckle up even though you are an is unbuckled when the ignition switch is to buckle their seat belts. excellent driver, even on short trips. first in the START or ON/RUN position Someone on the road may be a poor the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on Change of Status driver and could cause a collision that and remain on until both outboard front If the driver or outboard front seat includes you. This can happen far away seat belts are buckled. The outboard passenger (if equipped with outboard from home or on your own street. front passenger seat BeltAlert is not front passenger seat BeltAlert) Research has shown that seat belts save active when an outboard front passenger unbuckles their seat belt while the lives, and they can reduce the seat is unoccupied. vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning seriousness of injuries in a collision. sequence will begin until the seat belts Some of the worst injuries happen when are buckled again. people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat The outboard front passenger seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection BeltAlert is not active when the outboard and the risk of injury caused by striking front passenger seat is unoccupied. the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a BeltAlert may be triggered when an motor vehicle should be belted at all animal or other items are placed on the times. outboard front passenger seat or when 105 the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, A twisted seat belt may not protect you recommended that pets be restrained in inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, properly. In a collision, it could even cut into the rear seat (if equipped) in pet people riding in these areas are more likely you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your harnesses or pet carriers that are to be seriously injured or killed. body, without twists. If you can’t straighten secured by seat belts, and cargo is a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your SAFETY Do not allow people to ride in any area of properly stowed. authorized dealer immediately and have it your vehicle that is not equipped with seats fixed. and seat belts. Lap/Shoulder Belts A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap All seating positions in your vehicle are seat and using a seat belt properly. equipped with lap/shoulder belts. portion could ride too high on your body, Occupants, including the driver, should possibly causing internal injuries. Always The seat belt webbing retractor will lock always wear their seat belts whether or not buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest only during very sudden stops or an air bag is also provided at their seating you. collisions. This feature allows the position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. A seat belt that is too loose will not shoulder part of the seat belt to move protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you freely with you under normal conditions. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could could move too far forward, increasing the However, in a collision the seat belt will make your injuries in a collision much worse. possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt lock and reduce your risk of striking the Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you snugly. inside of the vehicle or being thrown out could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt A seat belt that is worn under your arm is of the vehicle. safely and to keep your passengers safe, dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside too. surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt Warning! Two people should never be belted into a worn under the arm can cause internal single seat belt. People belted together can injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder crash into one another in a collision, hurting bones. Wear the seat belt over your Relying on the air bags alone could lead to one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder shoulder so that your strongest bones will more severe injuries in a collision. The air belt or a lap belt for more than one person, take the force in a collision. bags work with your seat belt to restrain no matter what their size. you properly. In some collisions, the air bags A shoulder belt placed behind you will not won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat protect you from injury during a collision. belt even though you have air bags. Youare more likely to hit your head in a Warning! collision if you do not wear your shoulder In a collision, you and your passengers can belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to suffer much greater injuries if you are not be used together. properly buckled up. Youcan strike the A lap belt worn too high can increase the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic Always be sure you and others in your bones, but across your abdomen. Always vehicle are buckled up properly. wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. 106 A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart 6. To release the seat belt, push the red in a collision and leave you with no button on the buckle. The seat belt will protection. Inspect the seat belt system automatically retract to its stowed periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or position. If necessary, slide the latch loose parts. Damaged parts must be plate down the webbing to allow the seat replaced immediately. Do not disassemble belt to retract fully. or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting collision. Procedure Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Use the following procedure to untwist a 06046S0001NA twisted lap/shoulder belt. Instructions Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat Belt Buckle 1. Position the latch plate as close as 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. possible to the anchor point. Sit back and adjust the seat. 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt above the latch plate, grasp and twist the back of the front seat, and next to your portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create arm in the rear seat (for vehicles loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the a fold that begins immediately above the equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug latch plate. latch plate and pull out the seat belt. seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the Slide the latch plate up the webbing as the seat belt in a collision. far as necessary to allow the seat belt to folded webbing. The folded webbing go around your lap. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the must enter the slot at the top of the latch shoulder and chest with minimal, if any plate. 3. When the seat belt is long enough to slack so that it is comfortable and not 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle resting on your neck. The retractor will until it clears the folded webbing and the until you hear a “click.” withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. seat belt is no longer twisted.

107 Second Row Center Seat Belt The second row center seat belt features 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug Operating Instructions a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and and lies low across your hips, below your buckle, which allows the seat belt to abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt detach from the lower anchor when the portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on SAFETY regular latch plate can then be stored out the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the of the way in the parcel tray for added risk of sliding under the seat belt in a convenience to open up utilization of the collision. storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied. 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and resting on your neck. The retractor will regular latch plate from its stowed withdraw any slack in the seat belt. position in the right rear side trim panel. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the button on the buckle. seat belt over the seat. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside from the mini-buckle for storage, insert of the right head restraint. the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini-buckle. The 4. When the seat belt is long enough to seat belt will automatically retract to its fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the stowed position. If necessary, slide the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” latch plate down the webbing to allow the 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch seat belt to retract fully. Insert the plate up the webbing as far as necessary mini-latch plate and regular latch plate to allow the seat belt to go around your into its stowed position. 06056S0002EM Second Row Seat Belts lap. 6. When the seat belt is long enough to 1 — Seat Belt 2 — Seat Belt Warning! Buckle Latch Plate fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 3 — Mini Latch 4 — Mini Seat Belt Plate Buckle If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is 5 — Mini Buckle used by an occupant, the seat belt will not Release be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

108 When reattaching the mini-latch plate designed to remove slack from the seat Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt belt in the event of a collision. These Restraints” section of this manual. The webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is devices may improve the performance of figure below illustrates the locking twisted, follow the preceding procedure to the seat belt by removing slack from the feature for each seating position. detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, seat belt early in a collision. untwist the webbing, and reattach the Pretensioners work for all size mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. occupants, including those in child restraints. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Note: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). 06086S0102NA Like the air bags, the pretensioners are ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking single use items. A deployed Retractor pretensioner or a deployed air bag must If the passenger seating position is be replaced immediately. equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt 0226075266 Energy Management Feature Pregnant Women And Seat Belts webbing out far enough to comfortably The front seat belt system is equipped wrap around the occupant’s mid-section Seat belts must be worn by all occupants with an Energy Management feature that so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR including pregnant women: the risk of may help further reduce the risk of injury is activated, you will hear a clicking sound injury in the event of an accident is in the event of a collision. The seat belt as the seat belt retracts. Allow the reduced for the mother and the unborn system has a retractor assembly that is webbing to retract completely in this child if they are wearing a seat belt. designed to release webbing in a case and then carefully pull out only the Position the lap belt snug and low below controlled manner. amount of webbing necessary to the abdomen and across the strong comfortably wrap around the occupant’s bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt Switchable Automatic Locking mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the across the chest and away from the neck. Retractors (ALR) buckle until you hear a "click." Never place the shoulder belt behind the In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder The seat belts in the passenger seating back or under the arm. belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat positions are equipped with a Switchable belt will still retract to remove any slack Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which Seat Belt Pretensioner in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic is used to secure a child restraint system. Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is The front seat belt system is equipped For additional information, refer to installed in a seating position that has a with pretensioning devices that are “Installing Child Restraints Using The 109 seat belt with this feature. Children and activate the vehicle sensitive may be equipped with the following Air 12 years old and under should always be (emergency) locking mode. Bag System Components: properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. Air Bag System Components Warning! SAFETY Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Warning! Air Bag Warning Light The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Steering Wheel and Column Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat Instrument Panel front of an air bag. A deploying passenger belt function is not working properly when front air bag can cause death or serious checked according to the procedures in the Knee Impact Bolsters Service Manual. injury to a child 12 years or younger, Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags including a child in a rear-facing child Failure to replace the seat belt assembly restraint. could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Buckle Switch Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Side Air Bags vehicle with a rear seat. to restrain occupants who are wearing the Supplemental Knee Air Bags seat belt or children who are using booster How To Engage The Automatic Locking seats. The locked mode is only used to Front and Side Impact Sensors install rear-facing or forward-facing child Mode restraints that have a harness for Seat Belt Pretensioners 1. Buckle the combination lap and restraining the child. Seat Track Position Sensors shoulder belt. Air Bag Warning Light 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull Supplemental Restraint Systems downward until the entire seat belt is (SRS) extracted. Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the on some models, or may be optional The ORC monitors the readiness of the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking equipment on others. If you are not sure, electronic parts of the air bag system sound. This indicates the seat belt is now ask your authorized dealer. whenever the ignition switch is in the in the Automatic Locking Mode. START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition The air bag system must be ready to switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC How To Disengage The Automatic protect you in a collision. The Occupant Locking Mode position, the air bag system is not on and Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the the air bags will not inflate. Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder internal circuits and interconnecting belt and allow it to retract completely to wiring associated with the electrical Air The ORC contains a backup power supply disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Bag System Components. Yourvehicle system that may deploy the air bag 110 system even if the battery loses power or Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, Warning Light comes on intermittently or it becomes disconnected prior to or any engine related gauges are not remains on while driving have an deployment. working, the Occupant Restraint authorized dealer service the vehicle The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In immediately. For additional information Light in the instrument panel for this condition the air bags may not be regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning approximately four to eight seconds for a ready to inflate for your protection. Have Light refer to “Getting To Know Your self-check when the ignition switch is an authorized dealer service the air bag Instrument Panel” section of this manual. system immediately. first in the ON/RUN position. After the Front Air Bags self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction This vehicle has front air bags and in any part of the system, it turns on the Warning! lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and Air Bag Warning Light, either front passenger. The front air bags are a momentarily or continuously. A single supplement to the seat belt restraint chime will sound to alert you if the light Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have systems. The driver front air bag is comes on again after initial startup. the air bag system to protect you in a mounted in the center of the steering The ORC also includes diagnostics that collision. If the light does not come on as a wheel. The passenger front air bag is will illuminate the instrument panel Air bulb check when the ignition is first turned mounted in the instrument panel, above Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if the glove compartment. The words “SRS detected that could affect the air bag it comes on as you drive, have an authorized ” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on system. The diagnostics also record the dealer service the air bag system the air bag covers. nature of the malfunction. While the air immediately. bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following Redundant Air Bag Warning Light occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

The Air Bag Warning Light does not If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is come on during the four to eight seconds detected, which could affect the when the ignition switch is first in the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), ON/RUN position. the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will The Air Bag Warning Light remains on illuminate on the instrument panel. The after the four to eight-second interval. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will 06106S0001EM stay on until the fault is cleared. In Driver Air Bag The Air Bag Warning Light comes on addition, a single chime will sound to alert intermittently or remains on while you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning driving. Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag 111 collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. Warning! This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt Being too close to the steering wheel or

SAFETY buckle switch that detects whether the instrument panel during front air bag driver or front passenger seat belt is deployment could cause serious injury, buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may including death. Air bags need room to adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending Front Air Bags. your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. This vehicle may be equipped with driver

06106S0002EM and/or front passenger seat track Never place a rear-facing child restraint position sensors that may adjust the Passenger Air Bag in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air injury to a child 12 years or younger, Bags based upon seat position. including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Warning! vehicle with a rear seat. No objects should be placed over or near Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects Features could cause harm if the vehicle is in a The Advanced Front Air Bag system has collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. multistage driver and front passenger air 0502122443US bags. This system provides output Do not put anything on or around the air Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations appropriate to the severity and type of bag covers or attempt to open them manually. Youmay damage the air bags and 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may you could be injured because the air bags 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact may no longer be functional. The protective receive information from the front Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags covers for the air bag cushions are designed impact sensors (if equipped) or other to open only when the air bags are inflating. system components. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to The first stage inflator is triggered more severe injuries in a collision. The air immediately during an impact that bags work with your seat belt to restrain requires air bag deployment. A low you properly. In some collisions, air bags energy output is used in less severe won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. 112 Front Air Bag Operation than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while Front Air Bags are designed to provide helping to restrain the driver and front additional protection by supplementing passenger. the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in Knee Impact Bolsters rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect collisions, including some that may the knees of the driver and front produce substantial vehicle damage — passenger, and position the front for example, some pole collisions, occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. underrides, and angle offset collisions. 06096S0102NA On the other hand, depending on the type Driver Knee Air Bag and location of impact, front air bags may Warning! deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee Because air bag sensors measure vehicle impact bolsters in any way. deceleration over time, vehicle speed and Do not mount any accessories to the knee damage by themselves are not good impact bolsters such as alarm lights, indicators of whether or not an air bag stereos, citizen band radios, etc. should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your Supplemental Driver And Front protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away Passenger Knee Air Bags from an inflating air bag. 06096S0103NA This vehicle is equipped with a Front Passenger Knee Air Bag When the ORC detects a collision Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag requiring the front air bags, it signals the mounted in the instrument panel below Supplemental Side Air Bags inflator units. A large quantity of the steering column and a Supplemental Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the Bags (SABs) front air bags. instrument panel below the glove This vehicle is equipped with The steering wheel hub trim cover and compartment. The Supplemental Knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air the upper right side of the instrument Air Bags provide enhanced protection Bags (SABs). panel separate and fold out of the way as during a frontal impact by working the air bags inflate to their full size. The together with the seat belts, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air front air bags fully inflate in less time pretensioners, and front air bags. Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are 113 marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or outboard occupants in certain side “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! side of the seats. reduction potential provided by the seat The SABs may help to reduce the risk of belts and body structure. Do not use accessory seat covers or place

SAFETY occupant injury during certain side The SABIC deploys downward, covering impacts, in addition to the injury objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the side windows. An inflating SABIC reduction potential provided by the seat the performance could be adversely pushes the outside edge of the headliner belts and body structure. affected and/or objects could be pushed into out of the way and covers the window. you, causing serious injury. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events. SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or 06106S0004EM Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side “AIRBAG.” Warning! Air Bag

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam Do not mount equipment, or stack on the outboard side of the seatback’s luggage or other cargo up high enough to trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys block the deployment of the SABICs. The through the seat seam into the space trim covering above the side windows where between the occupant and the door. The the SABIC and its deployment path are SAB moves at a very high speed and with located should remain free from any such a high force that it could injure obstructions. occupants if they are not seated In order for the SABICs to work as properly, or if items are positioned in the intended, do not install any accessory items area where the SAB inflates. Children are 06106S0005EM in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do at an even greater risk of injury from a Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable not add an aftermarket sunroof to your deploying air bag. Curtain (SABIC) Location vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) SABICs may help reduce the risk of head for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not and other injuries to front and rear seat drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. 114 Side Impacts Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could The Side Air Bags are designed to Warning! lead to more severe injuries in a collision. activate in certain side impacts. The The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) to restrain you properly. In some collisions, determines whether the deployment of Occupants, including children, who are up Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always the Side Air Bags in a particular impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. event is appropriate, based on the seriously injured or killed. Occupants, severity and type of collision. The side including children, should never lean on or impact sensors aid the ORC in sleep against the door, side windows, or Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious area where the side air bags inflate, even if determining the appropriate response to they are in an infant or child restraint. in the interior trim, but they will open impact events. The system is calibrated during air bag deployment. to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact Seat belts (and child restraints where Rollover Events appropriate) are necessary for your side of the vehicle during impacts that Side Air Bags are designed to activate in require Side Air Bag occupant protection. protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating certain rollover events. The ORC In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy Side Air Bag. To get the best protection determines whether the deployment of independently; a left side impact deploys from the Side Air Bags, occupants must the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover the left Side Air Bags only and a wear their seat belts properly and sit event is appropriate, based on the right-side impact deploys the right Side upright with their backs against the seats. severity and type of collision. Vehicle Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is Children must be properly restrained in a damage by itself is not a good indicator not a good indicator of whether or not child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. of whether or not Side Air Bags should Side Air Bags should have deployed. have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions rollover events. The rollover sensing at certain angles, or some side collisions Warning! system determines if a rollover event that do not impact the area of the may be in progress and whether passenger compartment. The Side Air deployment is appropriate. In the event Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not Bags may deploy during angled or offset the vehicle experiences a rollover or near frontal collisions where the front air bags lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. rollover event, and deployment of the deploy. Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover Side Air Bags are a supplement to the Being too close to the Side Air Bags sensing system will also deploy the seat seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be belt pretensioners on both sides of the severely injured or killed. deploy in less time than it takes to blink vehicle. your eyes. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. 115 Air Bag System Components If A Deployment Occurs Do not drive your vehicle after the air Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller bags have deployed. If you are involved in The front air bags are designed to deflate another collision, the air bags will not be (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and immediately after deployment. interconnecting wiring associated with in place to protect you. Note: Front and/or side air bags will not

SAFETY electrical Air Bag System Components deploy in all collisions. This does not listed below: mean something is wrong with the air bag Warning! Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system. Air Bag Warning Light If you do have a collision which deploys Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners the air bags, any or all of the following cannot protect you in another collision. Have Steering Wheel and Column may occur: the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an Instrument Panel The air bag material may sometimes authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Knee Impact Bolsters cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to Occupant Restraint Controller System the occupants as the air bags deploy and serviced as well. Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags unfold. The abrasions are similar to Seat Belt Buckle Switch friction rope burns or those you might get Note: sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. Supplemental Side Air Bags They are not caused by contact with Air bag covers may not be obvious in Supplemental Knee Air Bags chemicals. They are not permanent and the interior trim, but they will open normally heal quickly. However, if you during air bag deployment. Front and Side Impact Sensors haven’t healed significantly within a few After any collision, the vehicle should Seat Belt Pretensioners days, or if you have any blistering, see be taken to an authorized dealer your doctor immediately. Seat Track Position Sensors immediately. As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. 116 Enhanced Accident Response Unlock the . Enhanced Accident Response System Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (if System Reset Procedure In the event of an impact, if the equipped). After the event occurs, when the system communication network remains intact, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor. is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff and the power remains intact, depending is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from on the nature of the event, the ORC will Cut off battery power to the: ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/ determine whether to have the Enhanced –Engine RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Accident Response System perform the Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks following functions: –Electric power steering in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and Cut off fuel to the engine. –Brake booster fuel tank before resetting the system and Flash hazard lights as long as the –Electric park brake starting the engine. battery has power or until the hazard –Automatic transmission gear Depending on the nature of the event the light button is pressed. The hazard lights selector left and right turn signal lights, located in can be deactivated by pressing the –Horn the instrument panel, may both be hazard light button. blinking and will continue to blink. In order Turn on the interior lights, which –Front wiper to move your vehicle to the side of the remain on as long as the battery has –Headlamp washer pump road, you must follow the system reset power or for 15 minutes from the procedure. intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.

Customer Action Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light BLINKS. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS.

117 Customer Action Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds SAFETY Right turn light is OFF. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Right turn light is OFF. Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF. 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be System is now reset and the engine may be started. completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

118 Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during This vehicle is equipped with an event a crash investigation. Warning! data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of To read data recorded by an EDR, special an EDR is to record, in certain crash or equipment is required, and access to the near crash-like situations, such as an air vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition Modifications to any part of the air bag bag deployment or hitting a road to the vehicle manufacturer, other system could cause it to fail when you need obstacle, data that will assist in it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system parties, such as law enforcement, that understanding how a vehicle’s systems is not there to protect you. Do not modify have the special equipment, can read the performed. The EDR is designed to the components or wiring, including adding information if they have access to the record data related to vehicle dynamics any kind of badges or stickers to the vehicle or the EDR. steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper and safety systems for a short period of right side of the instrument panel. Do not time, typically 30 seconds or less. The Child Restraints modify the front bumper, vehicle body EDR in this vehicle is designed to record Everyone in your vehicle needs to be structure, or add aftermarket side steps or such data as: running boards. buckled up at all times, including babies How various systems in your vehicle and children. Every state in the United It is dangerous to try to repair any part of were operating; States, and every Canadian province, the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell requires that small children ride in proper anyone who works on your vehicle that it Whether or not the driver and restraint systems. This is the law, and you has an air bag system. passenger safety belts were can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Do not attempt to modify any part of your buckled/fastened; Children 12 years or younger should ride air bag system. The air bag may inflate How far (if at all) the driver was accidentally or may not function properly if properly buckled up in a rear seat, if modifications are made. Take your vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake available. According to crash statistics, to an authorized dealer for any air bag pedal; and, children are safer when properly system service. If your seat, including your How fast the vehicle was traveling. restrained in the rear seats rather than in trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced the front. in any way (including removal or These data can help provide a better loosening/tightening of seat attachment understanding of the circumstances in bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized which crashes and injuries occur. dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat Note: EDR data are recorded by your accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation with disabilities, contact your authorized occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR dealer. under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR 119 to the child almost large enough for an Note: adult safety belt. Always check the child Warning! For additional information, refer to seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or have the correct seat for your child. call: 1–888–327–4236 In a collision, an unrestrained child can Carefully read and follow all the SAFETY become a projectile inside the vehicle. The instructions and warnings in the child Canadian residents should refer to force required to hold even an infant on your restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the Transport Canada’s website for lap could become so great that you could not labels attached to the child restraint. additional information: hold the child, no matter how strong you are. Before buying any restraint system, http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ The child and others could be badly injured or make sure that it has a label certifying motorvehiclesafety/ killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Youshould also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where There are different sizes and types of you will use it. restraints for children from newborn size Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of limits of their child restraint the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have out-grown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too small seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

120 Infant And Child Restraints booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with Warning! Safety experts recommend that children knees bent over the vehicle’s seat ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they cushion while the child’s back is against are two years old or until they reach Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the seatback, they should use a either the height or weight limit of their front of an air bag. A deploying passenger belt-positioning booster seat. The child rear-facing child restraint. Two types of front air bag can cause death or serious and belt-positioning booster seat are child restraints can be used rear-facing: injury to a child 12 years or younger, held in the vehicle by the seat belt. infant carriers and convertible child including a child in a rear-facing child seats. restraint. Warning! The infant carrier is only used rear-facing Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a in the vehicle. It is recommended for vehicle with a rear seat. children from birth until they reach the Improper installation can lead to failure weight or height limit of the infant carrier. of an infant or child restraint. It could come Convertible child seats can be used either Older Children And Child Restraints loose in a collision. The child could be badly rear-facing or forward-facing in the Children who are two years old or who injured or killed. Follow the child restraint vehicle. Convertible child seats often have outgrown their rear-facing manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. have a higher weight limit in the convertible child seat can ride rear-facing direction than infant carriers forward-facing in the vehicle. After a child restraint is installed in the do, so they can be used rear-facing by Forward-facing child seats and vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat children who have outgrown their infant convertible child seats used in the forward or rearward because it can loosen carrier but are still less than at least two forward-facing direction are for children the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle years old. Children should remain who are over two years old or who have rear-facing until they reach the highest seat position. When the vehicle seat has outgrown the rear-facing weight or been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. weight or height allowed by their height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. convertible child seat. Children should When your child restraint is not in use, remain in a forward-facing child seat with secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the a harness for as long as possible, up to vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In the highest weight or height allowed by a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the the child seat. occupants or seatbacks and cause serious All children whose weight or height is personal injury. above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning

121 Children Too Large For Booster 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the out of position. If the shoulder belt Seats child’s shoulder between their neck and contacts the face or neck, move the child arm? closer to the center of the vehicle, or use Children who are large enough to wear a booster seat to position the seat belt the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as on the child correctly. SAFETY legs are long enough to bend over the possible, touching the child’s thighs and front of the seat when their back is not the stomach? against the seatback, should use the seat 5. Can the child stay seated like this for Warning! belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step the whole trip? test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt was “no,” then the child still needs to use a under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, 1. Can the child sit all the way back booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is the shoulder belt will not protect a child against the back of the vehicle seat? using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat properly, which may result in serious injury or belt fit periodically and make sure the death. A child must always wear both the lap 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the front of the vehicle seat – while squirming or slouching can move the belt correctly. the child is still sitting all the way back? Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight LATCH – Lower Restraint Type of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

122 Lower Anchors And Tethers For system has three vehicle anchor points LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for installing LATCH-equipped child Restraints In This Vehicle seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a 022668173 top tether anchorage but no lower LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, Yourvehicle is equipped with the child the seat belt must be used with the top 06086S0101NA restraint anchorage system called tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors restraint. Please see the following table Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH for more information. (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system anchorage system to attach the child restraint? once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.

123 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Can a child seat be installed in the center Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a position using the inner LATCH lower No child seat in the center seating position.

SAFETY anchorage? Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower Can two child restraints be attached using a No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child common lower LATCH anchorage? seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes manufacturer also allows contact. See your back of the front passenger seat? child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Only the center head restraint can be removed

Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether The lower anchorages Anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap found at the rear of the anchorages behind each seat cushion where it rear seating position meets the seatback. located in the panel Each anchorage is between the rear under a cover with the seatback and the rear anchorage symbol on it. window. They are found Lift the cover to access the lower under a plastic cover anchorage. 06086S0009EM with the tether anchorage symbol on it. LATCH Anchorage Locations 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations

124 Center Seat LATCH 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach Warning! the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

Do not install a child restraint in the 2. Place the child seat between the center position using the LATCH system. lower anchorages for that seating This position is not approved for installing position. For some second row seats, you child seats using the LATCH attachments. may need to recline the seat and / or raise Youmust use the seat belt and tether the head restraint to get a better fit. If 06086S0104NA anchor to install a child seat in the center the rear seat can be moved forward and Upper Tether Anchorage Location seating position. rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to LATCH-compatible child restraint Never use the same lower anchorage to move it to its rear-most position to make systems will be equipped with a rigid bar attach more than one child restraint. Please room for the child seat. Youmay also refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible or a flexible strap on each side. Each will move the front seat forward to allow Child Restraint System” for typical more room for the child seat. have a hook or connector to attach to the installation instructions. lower anchorage and a way to tighten the 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors connection to the anchorage. of the child restraint to the lower Forward-facing child restraints and some Always follow the directions of the child anchorages in the selected seating rear-facing child restraints will also be restraint manufacturer when installing position. equipped with a tether strap. The tether your child restraint. Not all child restraint strap will have a hook at the end to attach systems will be installed as described 4. If the child restraint has a tether to the top tether anchorage and a way to here. strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing tighten the strap after it is attached to To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child the anchorage. Child Restraints Using the TopTether Restraint Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, the child restraint rearward and following the instructions below. See the downward into the seat. Remove slack in section “Installing Child Restraints Using the straps according to the child restraint the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type manufacturer’s instructions. of seat belt each seating position has.

125 6. Test that the child restraint is Child restraint anchorages are designed a clicking noise while the webbing is installed tightly by pulling back and forth to withstand only those loads imposed by pulled back into the retractor. Refer to on the child seat at the belt path. It should correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no the “Automatic Locking Mode” not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in circumstances are they to be used for adult description in “Switchable Automatic any direction. seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Locking Retractors (ALR)” under SAFETY items or equipment to the vehicle. “Occupant Restraint Systems” for How To Stow An Unused additional information on ALR. Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: Installing Child Restraints Using Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. When using the LATCH attaching system The Vehicle Seat Belt to install a child restraint, stow all ALR Child restraint systems are designed to Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For seat belts that are not being used by be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or Installing Child Restraints In This other occupants or being used to secure the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. child restraints. An unused belt could Vehicle injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using Warning! the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the Improper installation or failure to child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt properly secure a child restraint can lead to interferes with the child restraint failure of the restraint. The child could be installation, instead of buckling it behind badly injured or killed. the child restraint, route the seat belt Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s through the child restraint belt path and directions exactly when installing an infant 06086S0102NA then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. or child restraint. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Remind all children in the vehicle that the Locations seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. The seat belts in the passenger seating ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking positions are equipped with a Switchable Retractor Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that TopTether Anchorage Symbol Warning! is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” of the restraint. The child could be badly into a locked mode by pulling all of the injured or killed. Follow the child restraint webbing out of the retractor and then manufacturer’s directions exactly when letting the webbing retract back into the installing an infant or child restraint. retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make 126 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight Always use the tether anchor when using the of the child restraint) for using the Tether seat belt to install a forward facing child Weight limit of the Child Restraint Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward restraint, up to the recommended weight limit facing child restraint? of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child back of the front passenger seat? restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Only the center head restraint can be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating seat belt against the belt path of the child No position with an ALR retractor. restraint?

Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Switchable Automatic Locking the seating position. For some second until you hear a “click.” Retractor (ALR): row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or moved forward and rearward in the 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. vehicle, you may wish to move it to its shoulder part of the belt until you have rear-most position to make room for the pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the child seat. Youmay also move the front retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! seat forward to allow more room for the retract back into the retractor. As the child seat. webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing sound. This means the seat belt is now in Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. properly secure a child restraint can lead to from the retractor to pass it through the failure of the restraint. The child could be belt path of the child restraint. Do not 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the badly injured or killed. twist the belt webbing in the belt path. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s able to pull out any webbing. If the directions exactly when installing an infant retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. or child restraint.

127 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint 3. Route the tether strap to provide the to tighten the lap portion around the child System” for the location of approved tether most direct path for the strap between restraint while you push the child anchorages in your vehicle. the anchor and the child seat. If your restraint rearward and downward into vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear the vehicle seat. head restraints, raise the head restraint, SAFETY and where possible, route the tether 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap under the head restraint and strap and the seating position has a top between the two posts. If not possible, tether anchorage, connect the tether lower the head restraint and pass the strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap around the outboard side of tether strap. See the section “Installing the head restraint. Child Restraints Using the TopTether Anchorage” for directions to attach a 1. Look behind the seating position 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the tether anchor. where you plan to install the child child restraint to the top tether restraint to find the tether anchorage. anchorage as shown in the diagram. 9. Test that the child restraint is Youmay need to move the seat forward installed tightly by pulling back and forth to provide better access to the tether 5. Remove slack in the tether strap on the child seat at the belt path. It should anchorage. If there is no top tether according to the child restraint not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in anchorage for that seating position, manufacturer’s instructions. any direction. move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. Any seat belt system will loosen with Warning! time, so check the belt occasionally, and 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the pull it tight if necessary. anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint. An incorrectly anchored tether strap Installing Child Restraints Using could lead to increased head motion and The Top Tether Anchorage: possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Warning! If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not Do not attach a tether strap for a slip into the opening between the seatbacks rear-facing car seat to any location in front as you remove slack in the strap. of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating 06086S0104NA position, located behind the top of the Upper Tether Anchorage Location vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors 128 Transporting Pets SAFETY TIPS If you are required to drive with the Air Bags deploying in the front seat could Transporting Passengers trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be that all windows are closed and the climate NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. thrown about and possibly injured, or DO NOT use the recirculation mode. injure a passenger during panic braking or THE CARGO AREA. in a collision. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating Pets should be restrained in the rear seat Warning! or cooling controls to force outside air into in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. secured by seat belts. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The best protection against carbon build-up may cause serious injury or death. monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust It is extremely dangerous to ride in a system. cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are Whenever a change is noticed in the more likely to be seriously injured or killed. sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats vehicle, or when the underside or rear of and seat belts. the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a system and adjacent body areas for seat and using a seat belt properly. broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or Exhaust Gas loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the Warning! exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. 129 Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside Defroster ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR The Vehicle MATFROM THE VEHICLE before Check operation by selecting the defrost installing any other floor mat. NEVER install Seat Belts mode and place the blower control on or stack an additional floor mat on top of an high speed. Youshould be able to feel the existing floor mat. SAFETY Inspect the seat belt system periodically, air directed against the windshield. See checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. your authorized dealer for service if your ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that Damaged parts must be replaced defroster is inoperable. immediately. Do not disassemble or cannot be properly attached and secured to modify the system. Floor Mat Safety Information your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat Front seat belt assemblies must be Always use floor mats designed to fit for the specific make, model, and year of replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that your vehicle. assemblies must be replaced after a does not interfere with the operation of collision if they have been damaged (i.e., ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. the driver’s side floor area. To check for bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If Only use a floor mat that is securely interference, with the vehicle properly there is any question regarding seat belt attached using the floor mat fasteners so parked with the engine off, fully depress the or retractor condition, replace the seat it cannot slip out of position and interfere accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal belt. with the accelerator, brake or clutch (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of Air Bag Warning Light pedals or impair safe operation of your any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, vehicle in other ways. remove the floor mat from the vehicle and The Air Bag warning light will turn on place the floor mat in your trunk. for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to Warning! ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat ON/RUN. If the light is either not on on the passenger’s side floor area. during starting, stays on, or turns on while ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or driving, have the system inspected at An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or slide into the driver’s side floor area when your authorized dealer as soon as stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the vehicle is moving. Objects can become possible. After the bulb check, this light fasteners may cause your floor mat to trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch will illuminate with a single chime when a interfere with the accelerator, brake, or pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle fault with the Air Bag System has been clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or detected. It will stay on until the fault is DEATH: NEVER place any objects under the floor removed. If the light comes on ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects intermittently or remains on while mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT could change the position of the floor mat driving, have your authorized dealer install your floor mat upside down or turn and may cause interference with the service the vehicle immediately. Refer to your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners for further information. on a regular basis. 130 If the vehicle carpet has been removed Door Latches and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat Check for proper closing, latching, and fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. locking. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or Fluid Leaks clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. Check area under the vehicle after It is recommended to only use mild soap overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or and water to clean your floor mats. After other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes cleaning, always check your floor mat has are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid been properly installed and is secured to leaks are suspected. The cause should be your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners located and corrected immediately. by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks YouShould Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

131 This page is intentionally left blank

132 STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 134 see how you can explore its fullest ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — potential. We’ll look at how to drive IF EQUIPPED ...... 137 safely in any situation, making it a ENGINE BREAK-IN welcome companion with our comfort RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 137 and wallets in mind. ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 138 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....140 ALFA DNA SELECTOR ...... 146 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 148 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 149 SPEED LIMITER ...... 151 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 152 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 154 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM ...... 161 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 166 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES ...... 169 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 170 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 172 TRAILER TOWING ...... 173 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....173

133 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a adjust the seat, the interior rear view start from a booster battery or the battery mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten 1. Apply the electric park brake and set in another vehicle. This type of start can be the seat belt correctly. the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to NEUTRAL (N). “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” Never press the accelerator pedal before for further information. starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. starting procedure can be shown in the Caution! display. 3. Briefly push the ignition button. 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! continuously crank the engine for more than procedure. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds If the problem persists, contact an before trying again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove authorized dealer. the key fob from the vehicle and lock your STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle. Remote Starting System This system uses the key fob to start the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The system has a range of at least 300 reasons. A child or others could be seriously into the throttle body air inlet opening in an feet (91 meters). or fatally injured. Children should be warned attempt to start the vehicle. This could The remote starting system also not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal result in flash fire causing serious personal activates the climate control (if or the transmission gear selector. injury. equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), Do not leave the key fob in or near the Do not attempt to push or tow your and the heated steering wheel (if vehicle, or in a location accessible to vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped equipped), depending on temperatures children. A child could operate power with an automatic transmission cannot be outside and inside of the vehicle. windows, other controls, or move the started this way. Unburned fuel could enter vehicle. the catalytic converter and once the engine Note: has started, ignite and damage the Obstructions between the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside converter and vehicle. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat and key fob may reduce this range. build-up may cause serious injury or death.

134 How to use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Extended Park Starting Activation — If Equipped All of the following conditions must be If the vehicle has not been started or met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable Gear selector in PARK (P). outside ambient temperature is less than to follow the indications below. 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer Doors closed. To start the engine, proceed as follows: will be enabled. Exiting remote start will Hood closed. resume previous operation, except if the 1. Briefly push the ignition button Trunk closed. Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. 2. If the engine does not start, wait five The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and Hazard switch off. seconds and let the starter cool down and operation will continue. Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not then repeat the starting procedure pressed). Cold Weather Operation 3. If the engine does not start after eight Battery at an acceptable charge level. To prevent possible engine damage while attempts, let the starter cool down for at PANIC button not pushed. starting at low temperatures, this vehicle least 10 seconds, and then repeat the will inhibit engine cranking when the System not disabled from previous starting procedure ambient temperature is less than –22° F If the problem persists, contact your remote start event. (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor authorized dealer. Vehicle alarm system indicator reading indicates an engine block heater flashing. has not been used. An externally- Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, very difficult starting, that can be noticed Ignition in the OFF mode. powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from through rapid fatigue of the starter, Fuel level meets minimum your authorized dealer. might also be due to a discharged requirement. battery. In this case, see the "Jump The message “plug in engine heater” will Starting" section in the "In Case Of be displayed in the instrument cluster Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Emergency" chapter. Equipped when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is If Engine Fails To Start When Remote Start is activated, the shut off as a reminder to avoid possible heated steering wheel and driver heated Starting the Engine with Key Fob crank delays at the next cold start. seat features will automatically turn on in Battery Run Down or Drained cold weather. If the ignition does not respond when the These features will stay on through the Caution! button is pushed, the key fob battery duration of remote start also until the might be run down or drained. Therefore, ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. the system does not detect the presence Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is of the key fob in the vehicle, and will important to prevent engine damage and display a dedicated message. ensure satisfactory starting in cold In this case, follow the instructions conditions. outlined in "Starting With A Discharged 135 Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know After Starting — Warming Up The inform about the absence of the key on YourVehicle" chapter, and start the Engine board, only if the doors are closed. engine normally. Proceed as follows: Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON to the STOP position) the accessories are Travel slowly, letting the engine run at Warning! still powered for about three minutes, or a reduced RPM, without accelerating until a door is opened. suddenly. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid It is recommended to wait until the mode, the window switches remain active into the throttle body air inlet opening in an digital engine coolant temperature for three minutes. Opening a front door attempt to start the vehicle. This could indicator starts to rise for maximum will cancel this function. result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. performance. After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine Do not attempt to push or tow your Stopping The Engine compartment to cool before shutting off vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be To stop the engine, proceed as follows: the engine. started this way. Unburned fuel could enter Cool Down the catalytic converter and once the engine 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is STARTING AND OPERATING has started, ignite and damage the not dangerous for oncoming traffic. It is recommended before switching the converter and vehicle. 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a If the vehicle has a discharged battery, few minutes so that the turbocharger can booster cables may be used to obtain a 3. With engine idling, push the be suitably lubricated. This procedure is start from a booster battery or the battery START/STOP button on the steering particularly recommended after severe in another vehicle. This type of start can be wheel to STOP the engine. driving. dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON After a full load operation, keep the “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” engine idling for three to five minutes for further information. mode when the engine is off. To shut off the engine with vehicle speed before switching it off. greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must This time allows the lubricating oil and Caution! push and hold the ignition or push the the engine coolant to eliminate the START/STOP button three times excessive heat from combustion consecutively within a few seconds. The chamber, bearings, inner components and To prevent damage to the starter, do not engine will shut down, and the ignition will turbocharger. continuously crank the engine for more than be placed in the ON mode 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again. With the keyless ignition system, it is possible to go away from the vehicle taking the key fob with you, without the engine switching off. The vehicle will 136 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF Note: ENGINE BREAK-IN EQUIPPED The engine block heater cord is a RECOMMENDATIONS The engine block heater warms the factory installed option. If your vehicle is 2.0L GME T4 Engine Break-In engine and permits quicker starts in cold not equipped, heater cords are available For vehicles equipped with the 2.0L weather. from your authorized dealer. GME T4, use the following engine Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC The engine block heater will require break-in recommendations: electrical outlet with a grounded, 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate Despite modern technology and World three-wire extension cord. the heater element. Class Manufacturing methods, the For ambient temperatures below 0°F The engine block heater must be moving parts of the engine must still (-18°C), the engine block heater is plugged in at least 1 hour to have a wear in with each other. This wearing in recommended. For ambient warming effect on the engine and at occurs mainly during the first 500 miles temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the least 4 hours to have a warming effect (805 km) and continues through the first engine block heater is required. when ambient temperatures are below oil change interval. The engine block heater cord is routed -20 F (-29 C) Note: A new engine may consume some under the hood, behind to the driver’s oil during its first few thousand miles side headlamp. Follow the steps below to (kilometers) of operation. This should be properly use the engine block heater: Warning! considered a normal part of the break-in 1. Locate the engine block heater cord period and not interpreted as an (access door on the passenger side wiper Remember to disconnect the engine block indication of a problem. Please monitor cowl). heater cord before driving. Damage to the your oil level during the break-in period 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause and add oil as required. 2. Pull the cord to the front of the electrocution. It is recommended for the operator to vehicle and plug it into a grounded, observe the following driving behaviors three-wire extension cord. during the new vehicle break-in period: 3. After the vehicle is running, properly 0to100miles(0to160km): stow away behind access door on the Do not allow the engine to operate at passenger side wiper cowl. idle for an extended period of time. Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration. Avoid aggressive braking. Drive with the engine speed less than 3500 RPM. 137 Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic (88 km) and observe local speed limits. The vehicle is equipped with electric park Parking Brake". 100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km): brake to guarantee better use and In addition to engaging the electric park optimal performance compared to a brake, along with steering and positioning Press the accelerator pedal slowly and manually operated park brake. chocks in front of the wheels (when on a not more than halfway to avoid rapid The electric parking brake features a steep slope), you must always place the acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before gears). switch located on the center console, a motor with caliper for each rear wheel, leaving. Avoid aggressive braking. and an electronic control module. Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery must be replaced in order to Drive with the engine speed less than unlock the electric park brake. 5000 RPM. Engaging The Park Brake Manually Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed Briefly pull the switch located on the limits. center console to manually engage the electric park brake when the vehicle is 300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km): STARTING AND OPERATING stationary. Exercise the full engine rpm range, Noise may be heard from the rear of the shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) vehicle when engaging the electric at higher rpm’s when possible. parking brake. 07046S0001 A slight movement of the brake pedal Do not perform sustained operation Electric Park Brake Switch with the accelerator pedal at wide open may be detected when engaging the throttle. The electric parking brake can be electric parking brake with the brake engaged in two ways: pedal pressed. Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph With the electric parking brake engaged, (136 km/h) and observe local speed Manually, by pulling the switch on the center console. the BRAKE warning light on the limits. instrument panel and the switch will For the first 1500 miles (2414 km): Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto illuminate. Park Brake" conditions. Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities Note: Normally, the electric parking during the first 1500 miles (2414 km). brake is engaged automatically when the engine is stopped. This function can be Note: Monitor engine oil with every deactivated/activated on the refueling and add if necessary. Oil and Information and Entertainment system fuel consumption may be higher through by selecting the following items in the first oil change interval. sequence on the main menu: "Settings", 138 Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Do not leave the key fob in or near the Manually Caution! vehicle or in a location accessible to In order to manually release the park children. A child could operate power brake, the ignition should be in the ON windows, other controls, or move the With the Electronic Parking Brake failure mode. Press the brake pedal, and then vehicle. warning light on, some functions of the push the switch on the center console Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged electric parking brake are deactivated. In briefly. before driving; failure to do so can lead to this case the driver is responsible for brake brake failure and a collision. activation and vehicle parking in complete Noise may be heard from the rear of the safety conditions. vehicle, and a slight movement of the Always fully apply the park brake when brake pedal may be detected during leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause disengagement. damage or injury. If, under exceptional circumstances, the After disengaging the electric parking use of the brake is required with the brake, the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the instrument panel and the light on the Caution! center console pulled as long as the brake switch will turn off. action is necessary. If the BRAKE warning light on the The BRAKE warning light may turn on Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of instrument panel remains on with the with the hydraulic system temporarily the electric parking brake. Always engage electric parking brake disengaged, this unavailable, in this case braking is the electric parking brake when parking the indicates a fault: in this case, contact an vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused controlled by the motors. authorized dealer. by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. The brake lights will also automatically turn on in the same way as for normal Electric Park Brake Operating Modes braking with the use of the brake pedal. Warning! Release the switch on the center console The electric park brake may operate as to stop the braking action with the follows: vehicle in motion. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode with access to an unlocked vehicle. If, through this procedure, the vehicle is is activated by pulling the switch braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Allowing children to be in a vehicle repeatedly while driving. unattended is dangerous for a number of (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept "Static Engagement and Release pulled, the park brake will definitively reasons. A child or others could be seriously Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the engage. or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or electric park brake can be activated by Note: Driving the vehicle with the the gear selector. pulling the switch on the center console electric parking brake engaged, or using it several times to slow down the vehicle, once. On the other hand, push the switch may cause severe damage to the braking and the brake pedal at the same time to system. disengage the brake. 139 "Drive Away Release": the electric park Safe Hold AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION brake will automatically disengage with Safe Hold is a safety function that The vehicle can be equipped with an the driver side seat belt fastened and the automatically engages the electric park electronically controlled 8-speed detection of an action performed by the brake in the event of a dangerous automatic transmission where gear driver to move the vehicle (forward gear condition for the vehicle. shifting automatically takes place, or reverse gear). This feature can be The electric park brake engages depending on the vehicle usage turned on or off in the Information and automatically to prevent vehicle instantaneous parameters (vehicle Entertainment System. movement if: speed, grade, and accelerator pedal position). "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is The vehicle speed is below 2 mph The new transmission is an absolute (3 km/h). lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear innovation, as it can match the selector is not in PARK (P) position and A transmission operating mode Stop/Start system with the traditional the driver's intention of leaving the different from PARK (P) is activated. automatic transmissions with built-in vehicle is detected, the electric park The driver's seat belt is not fastened. torque converter. For further brake will automatically engage to hold information, refer to the “Stop/Start” The driver side door is open. the vehicle in safety conditions. section within this chapter. STARTING AND OPERATING No attempts to apply pressure on the "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed Manual gear shifting can still occur brake pedal have been detected. is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric thanks to the "sequential mode" position park brake will automatically engage The “Safe Hold” function can be for the gear selector. when the gear selector is in PARK (P) temporarily disabled by pressing the position. The light on the switch located switch located on the center console and the brake pedal at the same time, with Warning! on the center console switches on the vehicle stationary and the driver side together with the BRAKE warning light on door open. the instrument panel when the park brake It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Once disabled, the function will activate is engaged and applied to the wheels. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than again when the vehicle speed reaches idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing Each automatic park brake engagement 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled the brake pedal, the vehicle could can be cancelled by pressing the switch to STOP and then to ON. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. on the center console and at the same Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit time moving the gear selector for the someone or something. Only shift into gear transmission to position PARK (P). when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift 140 the transmission into PARK, and turn the Display The positions diagram is illustrated on the top of the gear selector. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in The following information is shown on the the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is dedicated area of the display: locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, number. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): lock the vehicle. the mode (M), the current gear and the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or double or single gear shift request, both with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing up and down (single or double arrow). children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally 07076S0002EM injured. Children should be warned not to Gear Selector Center Console touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the 1 — Gear Selector transmission gear selector. 2 — PARK (P) Button Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the AVVor ON The letter corresponding to the mode mode. A child could operate power windows, selected on the gear selector lights up other controls, or move the vehicle. and appears on the instrument cluster display. 07076S0001EM Gear Display To select a mode, move the gear selector Caution! forward or backwards, together with Gear Selector pressing the brake pedal and button to Damage to the transmission may occur if The gear functioning is controlled by the engage REVERSE (R). the following precautions are not observed: gear selector, which can assume the Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE following positions: only after the vehicle has come to a P = PARK complete stop. R = REVERSE Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is N = NEUTRAL above idle speed. D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) Before shifting into any gear, make sure AutoStick: + manually shift to higher your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. gear; – manually shift to lower gear 141 (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or stopped, and Warning! the brake pedal must also be pressed. Note: Never use the PARK position as a DO NOT accelerate while shifting substitute for the park brake. Always apply from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the park brake fully when parked to guard to another position. against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This Yourvehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by 07076S0005EM precaution is particularly important with trying to move the gear selector out of Gear Selector engine cold. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make 3 — Gear Selector Button sure the transmission is in PARK before Transmission Operating Modes leaving the vehicle. PARK (P) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or The gear selector is a joystick style

STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission is locked in this mode. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than shifting mechanism which returns to the The engine can be started in this mode. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing center position automatically. It can be Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) the brake pedal, the vehicle could pushed forward twice and rearward accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. twice, based on the starting condition. mode when the vehicle is moving. Before Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode someone or something. Only shift into gear The PARK (P) mode can be is engaged (letter P shown on the display enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK when the engine is idling normally and your and gear selector) and that the park foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (P) button. brake is engaged. Unintended movement of a vehicle could To transition the vehicle into REVERSE When parking on a flat surface, first (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all engage the PARK (P) mode and then vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) engage the electric park brake. while the engine is running. Before exiting a mode, it is necessary to move the gear vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift selector by pushing the gear selector When parking uphill, before activating the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric the transmission into PARK, and turn the button. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in park brake. Otherwise, it could be the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is When using AutoStick, activate it by difficult to engage the (P) mode. moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against to the left and then forward toward the - To check that the PARK (P) mode is unwanted movement. symbol or backward toward the + symbol actually engaged, make sure (P) is When leaving the vehicle, always make and the gear is changed. illuminated on the display and on the gear sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, selector. To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE 142 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL (N) vehicle's optimal driving characteristics with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Use this range when the vehicle is are provided for all conditions. children to be in a vehicle unattended is standing for prolonged periods with the AutoStick dangerous for a number of reasons. A child engine running. The engine may be In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for or others could be seriously or fatally started in this range. Apply the electric sport driving, when the vehicle is driven injured. Children should be warned not to park brake and shift the transmission touch the park brake, brake pedal or the with a heavy load or on slopes), it is into PARK (P) if you must leave the transmission gear selector. recommended to use the Autostick vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the (sequential shifting) mode to select and vehicle (or in a location accessible to keep a lower fixed ratio. children), and do not leave the ignition in the Warning! In these conditions, the use of a lower ON mode. A child could operate power gear improves vehicle performance, windows, other controls, or move the preventing overheating. vehicle. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) the ignition to coast down a hill. These are mode to sequential mode regardless of unsafe practices that limit your response to vehicle speed. Caution! changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a Activation collision. Starting from DRIVE (D), move the Before moving the transmission gear selector to the left (– and + indication of selector out of PARK, you must push the ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF DRIVE (D) the trim) to activate the sequential drive mode to the ON mode, and also press the Use this mode in normal driving mode. The gear engaged will be shown on brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear conditions. the display. selector could result. Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or Shifting is made by moving the gear DO NOT race the engine when shifting REVERSE (R) modes must take place selector forwards, towards symbol – or from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear only after releasing the accelerator backwards, towards symbol +. range, as this can damage the drivetrain. pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — If brake pedal pressed. Equipped REVERSE (R) This mode ensures automatic The gear can also be manually shifted by Select this mode only with the vehicle at engagement of the most suitable gears using the paddles behind the steering a standstill. for driving needs and maximum fuel wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the economy in terms of consumption. steering wheel and release it to engage a In this position, the transmission shifts higher gear, and perform the same the gears automatically, selecting the operation with the left paddle (-) to most suitable for forward driving among engage a lower gear. those available as you go. In this way the 143 Note: Temporary failure To select the correct gear for In the event of a momentary problem, the maximum deceleration (engine brake), transmission can be reset to regain all just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the forward gears by performing the transmission goes to an operating mode following steps: in which the vehicle can slow down 1. Stop the vehicle. easily. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), The vehicle will keep the gear if possible. If not, shift the transmission selected by the driver until the safety to NEUTRAL (N). conditions allow it. 07076S0006EM 3. Push and hold the ignition until the Steering Wheel Shift Paddles This means, for example, that the engine turns OFF. Note: If only one manual shift is system will try to prevent the engine necessary, the letter (D) will remain on from switching off, automatically 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then the display with the engaged gear downshifting if the engine speed is too restart the engine.

STARTING AND OPERATING next to it. low. 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the Deactivation Automatic Transmission Limp Home transmission will return to normal To deactivate the sequential driving Mode operation. mode, bring the gear selector back in Transmission function is monitored position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving Note: Even if the transmission can be electronically for abnormal conditions. If mode). reset, we recommend that you visit your a condition is detected that could result authorized dealer at your earliest in transmission damage, Transmission possible convenience. Yourauthorized Limp Home Mode is activated. Warning! dealer has diagnostic equipment to In this condition, the transmission stays determine if the problem could reoccur. If in fourth gear, regardless of the selected the transmission cannot be reset, service Do not downshift for additional engine gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) is required at your authorized dealer. braking on a slippery surface. The drive and NEUTRAL (N) still work. wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle The symbol might light up in the could skid, causing a collision or personal instrument cluster. injury.

144 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Important Notes System Failure to comply with what is reported Warning! This vehicle is equipped with a Brake below may damage the transmission: Transmission Shift Interlock system Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in vehicle at a standstill. PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing This system prevents you from moving from REVERSE to another mode only the brake pedal, the vehicle could the gear selector from position PARK (P) accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. unless the brakes are applied. with the vehicle at a standstill and engine Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit idling. To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), someone or something. Only shift into gear the ignition must be cycled to the AVV Do not change between PARK (P), when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. mode (engine running or not) and the REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) brake pedal must be pressed. modes with engine running at a speed Unintended movement of a vehicle could above idling. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle Disabling Before activating any transmission while the engine is running. Before exiting a Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the operating mode, fully depress the brake vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing pedal. the transmission into PARK, and turn the systems) inhibit the automatic activation ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in Note: The unexpected movement of the the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is of PARK (P) mode when stopping the vehicle can injure the occupants or locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against engine, or proceed as described below: people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle unwanted movement. 1. Vehicle at a standstill. with engine running: before getting out of When leaving the vehicle, always make the passenger compartment always sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, 2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated. engage the electric park brake, select the remove the key fob from the vehicle, and 3. Push the ignition button for at least PARK (P) mode, stop the engine. lock the vehicle. three seconds. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing The automatic park brake engagement children to be in a vehicle unattended is function when the engine is stopped can dangerous for a number of reasons. A child also be deactivated on the Information or others could be seriously or fatally and Entertainment system by selecting injured. Children should be warned not to the following functions on the main menu: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and transmission gear selector. "Automatic Parking Brake".

145 Do not leave the key fob in or near the ALFA DNA SELECTOR On the instrument panel display, the different modes are characterized by vehicle (or in a location accessible to Alfa DNA System children), and do not leave the ignition in the different colors: AVVor ON mode. A child could operate This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA Natural - Blue power windows, other controls, or move the system selector (located on the center Dynamic - Red vehicle. console). There are four modes of operation to be selected according to Advanced Efficiency - Green driving style and road conditions: Caution!

Only engage the gear with engine at idling while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the transmission temperature exceeds the normal operating limits, the transmission control unit may change the gear engagement order and reduce the drive

STARTING AND OPERATING torque. If the transmission overheats, it could operate incorrectly until it cools down. 07076S0003EM When using the vehicle with extremely 07076S0004BASE Mode Display low external temperatures, the Alfa DNA System Selector transmission operation may change Each driving mode is graphically different depending on the engine and transmission d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). in frame color and contents of each temperature, as well as vehicle speed. individual "performance" screen. Activation of the torque converter clutch n = Natural (mode for driving in normal and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the conditions). transmission oil is correctly warmed up. a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving Complete operation of the transmission will mode for maximum fuel savings). be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature reaches the predefined value. = Adjusts the calibration of the active suspension (if equipped). The symbol of the active mode lights up in red on the selector.

146 Driving Modes Engine and transmission: adoption of sports mapping. "Natural" Mode “Natural” Mode is characterized engine and transmission: standard response. Warning! Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the the letter "n", the displays light up in blue. accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

07116S0001EM Natural Mode Performance Display "Dynamic" Mode Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "d", the displays light up in red.

07116S0002EM Natural Mode The "Performance" screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely 07116S0006EM Dynamic Mode Performance Display linked to the efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption. The "Performance" screen displays parameters related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations 07116S0003EM (G-meter information), considering Dynamic Mode gravity acceleration as a reference unit. ESC and ASR systems: intervention Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, on the right. sportier driving while guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle.

147 "Advanced Efficiency" Mode ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION Activation (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED It is activated by rotating the selector to The vehicle's electronic suspensions the letter "a", the displays light up in management system is the result of a green. sophisticated elaboration of the various board sensors, aimed at optimizing the vehicle's performance. The system continuously monitors the damping of the suspensions through the actuator installed on each shock 07116S0008EM absorber. This way, the calibration of the Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance shock absorbers can be adjusted to the Display conditions of the road surface and to the Driving Mode Deactivation dynamic conditions of the vehicle, To deactivate any driving mode, simply improving its comfort and road holding. The driver can choose, even while driving, STARTING AND OPERATING move the selector to any other mode. 07116S0005EM (only in "Dynamic” mode), between two Advanced Efficiency Mode Note: types of suspension calibration: a more ESC and ASR systems: intervention When the engine is next started, the sporty or a more comfortable one. thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is "Natural" mode selected previously is advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" retained. The system will reactivate in mode in the presence of low-grip road "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or surfaces. "Natural" mode, depending on which “Advanced Efficiency” Mode is mode was selected before the engine characterized by reduced engine was stopped. performance and ECO shifting strategy When the engine is next started, the for the automatic transmission. "Race" mode selected previously is not The "Performance" screen graphically retained. The system will reactivate in displays some parameters closely related to the vehicle consumption. "Dynamic" mode. It is not possible to go directly from "Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You must always activate the “Natural” mode first and then select the other mode. 148 By pressing the button, the system STOP/START SYSTEM Restarting the Engine prepares to work with a shock absorber Stop/Start System To restart the engine, release the brake calibration which favours driving pedal. comfort. The Stop/Start system automatically With the brake pressed and the shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop transmission in automatic mode DRIVE if the required conditions are met. (D), the engine will restart by shifting to Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to pedal will automatically restart the "AutoStick". engine. With brake pressed if the gear selector is The function was developed to increase in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by consumption, gas emissions, and sound moving the selector to + or -. pollution. System Manual Activation/ Operating Mode Deactivation 04306S0001BASE “Alfa DNA” System Selector Stopping the Engine To manually activate/deactivate the With vehicle at a standstill and brake system, push the button located in the In case of a system failure, the symbol pedal pressed, the engine switches off if control panel on the left of the steering and a dedicated message will be the gear selector is in a position other wheel. shown on the instrument panel display. than REVERSE (R). The system does not operate when the gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to making parking maneuvers easier. In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works only with running engine). NOTE: The engine can only be automatically stopped after having run at

about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an 07126S0051EM automatic restart, the vehicle only needs Stop/Start Button to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stop the engine. Engine stopping is signaled by the symbol lighting up on the instrument cluster display. 149 System Activation During the first period of use, to Irregular Operation The activation of the system is indicated initialize the system. In the event of malfunction, the by the symbol lighting up on the Steering angle beyond threshold. Stop/Start system is deactivated. display. In this condition, the light on the For failure indications, see the "Warning button is off. Engine Restarting Conditions Lights and Messages" paragraph, System Deactivation Due to comfort, emission control and "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" A message will appear on the display safety reasons, the engine can restart chapter. automatically without any action by the when the system is deactivated. In this Vehicle Inactivity condition, the light on the button is on. driver, under special conditions, such as: Note: Each time the engine is started, Battery not sufficiently charged. In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the battery is replaced), special attention the system is activated regardless of Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. must be paid to the disconnection of the where was when it was previously if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). switched off. battery power supply. Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on Proceed as follows: Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not roads with a grade). Remove connector from socket to Autostop STARTING AND OPERATING Engine stopping by the Stop/Start disconnect sensor (battery status For higher comfort and increased safety, system for more than approx. three monitoring) installed on the negative pole and to reduce emissions, there are minutes. of the battery. This sensor should never certain conditions where the engine will With the automatic climate control be disconnected from the pole except if not autostop despite the system being the battery is replaced. active, an adjustment in cabin heating or active, such as: cooling is made or with MAX-DEF Engine still cold. function active. Especially cold outside temperature. Battery not sufficiently charged. Safety Functions Driver's door not shut. When the engine is stopped through the Driver's seat belt not fastened. Stop/Start system, if the driver releases their seat belt, opens the driver's or Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking passenger's door, or opens the hood from maneuvers). inside the vehicle, the engine can be With the automatic climate control restarted only by using the ignition. active, an adequate cabin heating or This condition is indicated to the driver cooling comfort has not been reached or both through a buzzer and a message on with MAX-DEF function active. the instrument cluster display.

150 SPEED LIMITER Description This feature allows the speed of the vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can be set by the driver. The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph (30mk/h).

07126S0002EM When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM Battery Power Supply speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display accelerator pedal until the programmed 1 — Socket Speed Limit Programming speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit 2 — Sensor Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed 3 — Connector through the Information and Activation Entertainment System. Note: After setting the ignition to STOP The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, and having closed the driver side door, deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: wait at least one minute before Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter disconnecting the electrical supply from Activating The Device Set Speed". the battery. When reconnecting the To access this feature on the main menu, By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed electrical supply to the battery, make select the following items in sequence: increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a and the driver side door is closed. “ON”. maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed by the displaying of the green symbol By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, along with the last speed set. The Speed the programmed speed can be exceeded Limiter feature can remain active even with the device active (e.g. in the concurrently with the Speed Control event of overtaking). system. If a speed limit below the one indicated in the Speed Control is The device is disabled until the speed selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. function remains available in RACE mode. 151 Programmed Speed Icon Flashing SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE The programmed speed will flash in the CONTROL) Warning! following scenarios: Speed Control Description When the accelerator pedal has been This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the fully pressed and the vehicle has assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. exceeded the programmed speed. desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Yourvehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and Activating the system after setting a without having to press the accelerator pedal. This feature can be used at a speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Control limit below the effective speed of the in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, vehicle. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long icy, snow-covered or slippery. stretches of dry, straight roads with few In the event of overtake acceleration. variations (highways). Activating Deactivation The speed control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Speed Control System, The feature can be activated/ push the on/off button location on the Note: deactivated through the Information and left side of the steering wheel. STARTING AND OPERATING Entertainment System. To ensure correct operation, the Deactivating The Device speed control is designed to deactivate To access this feature on the main menu, if more than one function is operated select the following items in sequence: simultaneously. In this case, the system "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and can be reactivated by pushing the on/off “OFF”. button and setting the desired speed. Automatic Deactivation Of The Device It is not recommended to use this The device deactivates automatically in feature in city traffic. the event of fault in the system. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set speed 07146S0001EM Temporary Signal Loss the same. Speed Control On/Off Switch When the devices loses the signal, the The activation of the system is signaled white symbol without the speed by the white warning light illuminating indication illuminates on the display. on the instrument cluster. System Failure If there is a system failure, the amber symbol illuminates on the display. 152 The Speed Control function can remain Decreasing Speed active at the same time as the Speed When the system is active, to reduce the Limiter System. If the set speed is higher speed, push the SET switch downward. than the speed set with the Speed By keeping the switch pushed, the set Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to speed will decrease until the switch is that of the Speed Limiter. released. The new speed will then be set. Note: The system cannot be engaged in At every movement of the SET switch, FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to the set speed can be adjusted. engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using the Autostick feature. Note: Moving the SET switch allows to adjust the speed according to the 07146S0002EM selected unit of measurement set on the SET Switch Location Information and Entertainment System Warning! If needed (when overtaking for instance), (see dedicated supplement). you can accelerate beyond the set speed Accelerating When Overtaking Leaving the Speed Control system on when by pressing the accelerator. When you Press the accelerator as you would not in use is dangerous. Youcould release the pedal, the vehicle will return normally. When the pedal is released, the accidentally set the system or cause it to go to the previously set speed. faster than you want. Youcould lose control vehicle will return to the set speed. When traveling downhill with the system and have an accident. Always leave the Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes system OFF when you are not using it. active, the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the set one. The system can automatically downshift Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the to keep the set speed when driving on Setting The Desired Speed vehicle must be traveling at a constant hilly routes. To set a desired speed, proceed as speed on a flat surface. On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed follows: may be considerable and is advisable to Increasing/Decreasing Speed deactivate the Speed Control. 1. Turn the Speed Control on. Increasing Speed Note: The system keeps the speed set 2. When the vehicle has reached the Once the Speed Control has been even uphill and downhill. A slight variation desired speed, push the SET switch up or activated, the speed can be increased by in the speed on slight rises is completely down and release to activate. When the pushing the SET switch upward. normal. accelerator is released, the vehicle will By keeping the switch pushed, the set maintain the selected speed speed will increase until the switch is automatically. released. The new speed will then be set. At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted. 153 Recalling The Speed Deactivating ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Once the system has been deactivated, Lightly pressing the brake pedal (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED but not canceled, the previously set deactivates the speed control without System Description speed can be recalled by pushing the RES deleting the set speed. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a button and removing your foot from the The speed control may also be driver assist system that combines the accelerator. The system will be set to the deactivated by applying the electric park speed control functions with controlling last stored speed. brake or when the braking system is the distance from the vehicle ahead. Note: Before resuming the previously operated (e.g. operation of the ESC set speed, you must accelerate to a system). The system allows to set and hold the vehicle at the desired speed without speed close to that speed. The set speed is deleted in the following needing to press the accelerator. It also cases: allows to set and hold a distance from the Pushing the on/off button a second vehicle ahead (these settings are set by time. the driver). The ignition is cycled to STOP. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a radar sensor located behind the front STARTING AND OPERATING If there is a malfunction with the bumper and a camera located in the Speed Control. center/upper part of the windshield, to detect the presence of a vehicle close ahead.

07146S0003EM Resume Button Location In Autostick (sequential) mode, before resuming the previously set speed, you should accelerate until you are close to that speed. Then, push and release the RES button.

06016S0003B Front Bumper Radar Location

154 Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop roads with steep climbs and descents, or while following a target vehicle and hold the roads with numerous turns and bends. vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not Entering a turn lane. start moving within 3 minutes the parking When circumstances do not allow brake will be activated, and the ACC system safe driving at a constant speed. will be canceled. Youshould switch off the ACC system: When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy Warning! snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway 06016S0004B construction zones). Windshield Camera Location Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a When entering a turn lane or highway off This system enhances driving comfort convenience system. It is not a substitute ramp; when driving on roads that are while on the highway or out of town with for active driving involvement. It is always winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have light traffic. the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of steep uphill or downhill slopes. road, traffic, and weather conditions, If the sensor does not detect a vehicle vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; When circumstances do not allow safe ahead, the system will maintain a fixed and, most importantly, brake operation to driving at a constant speed. set speed. ensure safe operation of the vehicle under If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention Activation/Deactivation system automatically intervenes by is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow The system has four operating states: braking (or accelerating) slightly in order these warnings can result in a collision and not to exceed the original set speed, so death or serious personal injury. Enabled (speed not set) that the vehicle keeps the preset distance, seeking to adapt to the speed The ACC system: Activated (speed set) of the vehicle ahead. Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming Paused Note: Adaptive Cruise Control vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a Deactivated performance is not guaranteed under the stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). following circumstances, and it is Enabling/Activating recommended to turn the system off Cannot take street, traffic, and weather To enable the system, push and release when: conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. the button located on the left side on Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow. the steering wheel. Does not always fully recognize complex Driving in heavy traffic or driving conditions, which can result in wrong construction zones. or missing distance warnings.

155 Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

07146S0010EM 07146S0017EM On/Off Button Pausing/Deactivating SET Switch With the feature enabled (speed not set), When the system is enabled and ready to push the button to disable. While the accelerator pedal is pressed, operate, the display shows the white icon the system will not be able to control the above dashes in place of the speed. With the feature active (speed set), push distance between the vehicle and the one the button to pause. The display will STARTING AND OPERATING ahead. In this case, the speed will be show the icon in white with the speed in determined only by the position of the brackets. To deactivate the feature, push accelerator pedal. the button a second time. The system will return to normal Setting The Desired Speed operation as soon as the accelerator pedal is released. The speed can be set from a minimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of The system cannot be set: 110 mph (180 km/h). When pressing the brake pedal. When the vehicle reaches the desired When the brakes are overheated. speed, push the SET switch upward or 07146S0016EM downward and release it to activate the When the electric park brake has been Enabled Icons system. When the accelerator is released, operated. Setting a speed activates the system. the vehicle will maintain the set speed When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or The display shows the icon in green with automatically. NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. the set speed.

156 When the engine rpm is above a To VaryThe Speed Setting By keeping the accelerator pedal maximum threshold. depressed, the vehicle can continue to Increasing Speed accelerate beyond the set speed. In this When the vehicle speed is not within Once the system has been activated, you case, use the SET switch to set the the operational speed range. can increase the speed by pushing the speed to the vehicle’s current speed. When the ESC (or ABS or other SET switch upward. Each time the switch When you push the SET button to stability control systems) are operating is pushed, the speed increases by 1 mph. reduce the speed, the braking system or have just operated. By pushing and holding the switch upward, the set speed will increase in intervenes automatically if the engine When the ESC system is off. increments of 5 mph until the switch is brake does not slow the vehicle down sufficiently to reach the set speed. The When the Forward Collision Warning released. Then, the new speed will be set. device holds the set speed uphill and system (if equipped) is braking Decreasing Speed downhill; however a slight variation is automatically. Once the system has been activated, you entirely normal, particularly on slight In the event of system failure. can decrease the speed by pushing the inclines. When the engine is OFF. SET switch downward. Each time the The transmission could shift to a switch is pushed, the speed decreases by lower gear when driving downhill, or In case of obstruction of the radar 1 mph. when accelerating. This is normal and sensor (in this case the bumper area By pushing and holding the switch necessary to maintain the set speed where it is located must be cleaned). downward, the set speed will decrease in If the system is set, the conditions increments of 5 mph until the switch is The system will disable while driving described above also cause a released. Then, the new speed will be set. if the brakes overheat. cancellation or deactivation of the Note: Accelerating When Overtaking system. These situations may vary according to the conditions. Moving the SET switch allows you to When driving with ACC activated and Note: The system will not be deactivated adjust the speed according to the following a vehicle, the system will when speeds higher than those set are selected unit of measurement ("US" or provide an additional acceleration up to reached by pressing the accelerator "Metric") set on the Information and the ACC set speed to assist in passing the pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In Entertainment System (see dedicated vehicle. This additional acceleration is these situations, the system may not supplement). triggered when the driver utilizes the left work correctly and it is recommended to turn signal and will only be active when When the unit of measurement is set passing on the left hand side. deactivate it. to Metric, pushing and holding the SET The system detects the direction of switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h traffic automatically when the vehicle increments. passes from left-hand traffic to right-hand traffic. In this case, the overtaking assist function is only active 157 when the reference vehicle is overtaken distance one-bar setting) to two seconds on the right. The additional acceleration (for the maximum distance four-bar Warning! is deactivated when the driver uses the setting). right direction indicator and returns to The set distance is shown on the display the original lane. The Resume function should only be used if by a dedicated icon. Resuming The Speed traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming The setting is four (maximum) the first a set speed that is too high or too low for time the system is used. After the prevailing traffic and road conditions could Once the system has been canceled but distance has been modified by the driver, not deactivated, to resume a previously cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to the new distance will be stored also after set speed, simply push the RES button the system is deactivated and and remove your foot from the follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. reactivated. accelerator to recall it. The system will be set to the last stored To Decrease The Distance speed. Setting The Distance Between Vehicles Push and release the distance button to The distance between your vehicle and decrease the distance setting. The the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar distance setting decreases by one bar STARTING AND OPERATING (short), two bars (medium), three bars (shorter) every time the button is pushed. (long), or four bars (maximum).

07146S0018EM RES (Resume) Button Before returning to the previously set 07146S0015EM speed, bring the speed close to that Distance Button value, then push the RES button and 07146S0019EM release it. Distance Icons The set speed is held if there are no The distances from the vehicle ahead are vehicles ahead. Once the shortest proportional to speed. distance has been selected, the next push of the button will set the maximum The interval of time with relation to the distance. vehicle ahead remains constant and varies from one second (for the short 158 If a slower vehicle is detected in the same The driver is fully responsible for holding The system is canceled (the set speed lane, the vehicle icon on the display a safe distance from the vehicle ahead and distance are stored): illuminates from grey to white. The respecting the highway code in force in the When the system is paused (Refer to system automatically adjusts the respective country. the “Activation / Deactivation” section). vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, independently of the set speed. When the conditions shown in the “Stop And Go” Function “Setting The Desired Speed” section The vehicle holds the set distance until: The “Stop and Go” operating strategy occur. The vehicle ahead accelerates to a allows you to maintain a safe distance speed higher than the set speed. from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle Limited Operation Warning The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or has completely stopped. It will also If the dedicated message is shown on the the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise restart the vehicle automatically if the display, a condition limiting the Adaptive Control system sensor. vehicle ahead drives away within two Cruise Control operation may have seconds, otherwise it is necessary to occurred. The distance setting is changed. press the accelerator pedal or push the This could be due to an obstruction of the The Adaptive Cruise Control system is RES button to restart. vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also deactivated/paused. be due to a fault in the system. If an Warning! obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield opposite the interior rear Warning! view mirror, where the camera is located, When the ACC system is resumed, the driver as well as the area of the front bumper must ensure that there are no pedestrians, where the sensor is located. Then check The maximum breaking applied by the vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. that the message has disappeared. Failure to follow these warnings can result in system is limited. The driver may apply the When the conditions limiting the system brakes in all cases if needed. a collision and death or serious personal injury. functions end, normal operation will If the system predicts that the braking resume. level is insufficient to hold the set distance, Should the fault persist, contact an either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is Deactivation displayed to warn the driver of approaching authorized dealer. the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also The system is deactivated and the set emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake speed is canceled if: immediately as necessary to hold a safe The (on/off) button is pushed distance from the vehicle ahead. (when the system is on or paused). The driver is responsible for ensuring that The ignition is cycled to STOP. there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or objectives along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries. 159 Precautions While Driving Lane Change The system may not work correctly in The system may not detect the presence some driving conditions (see below). The of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane. driver must control the vehicle at all times. Vehicle Not Aligned The system may not detect a vehicle traveling in the same lane, in the same direction, but is not aligned. It also may not detect a vehicle which is cutting in 07146S0011EM from a side lane. Sufficient distance from Steering And Curves the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases. Note: The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and 07146S0012EM In cases of narrow curves, the Lane Change out of the driving lane causing the vehicle performance of the system could be STARTING AND OPERATING to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. limited. In this case, it is advisable to In this case, sufficient distance from the vehicle which is changing lanes may not Steering And Curves deactivate the system. be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the Driving on curves with the system set The system only limits the speed utmost attention at all times and be could limit speed and acceleration to DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. always ready to apply the brakes if guarantee vehicle stability, even if no needed. vehicles are detected ahead. Using The System On Slopes When leaving the curve, the system When driving on roads with a variable Small Vehicles resets the previously set speed. incline, the system may not detect the Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and presence of a vehicle in the lane. System motorcycles) traveling near the outer performance could be limited according edges of the lane or which enter the lane to speed, load, traffic conditions and from curb side are not detected until they steep slopes. are fully in the lane.

160 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only The parking sensors, located in the rear bumper, detect obstacles while the vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle is detected, an acoustic alert will sound and visual indications will be displayed on the instrument cluster.

07146S0013EM 07146S0014EM Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these General Information cases. This vehicle has systems that operate on Stationary Objects And Vehicles radio frequency that comply with Part The system cannot detect the presence 15 of the Federal Communications of stationary vehicles or objects. For Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- example, the system will not operate if 07176S0001B the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a GEN/210/220/310. Rear Sensor Location vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in Operation is subject to the following two that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all conditions: times and be always ready to apply the brakes if needed. 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction 2. The device must accept any interference received, including The system cannot detect the presence interference that may cause undesired of objects or vehicles traveling in operation of the device. opposite or crosswise directions and consequently will not activate. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

161 Engagement/Disengagement System Activation/Deactivation Indication On Display To turn the system off, push the Park The system, when engaged, is The driver can select the type of warning Sensors System button located to the automatically activated by engaging the they would like to be displayed through left of the headlight switch. The indicator REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by the Information and Entertainment light within the button will illuminate engaging another gear. System. To access the function on the when the system is turned off. Pushing main menu, select in the following order: Acoustic Signal the button a second time will turn the system back on, and the indicator light When REVERSE is engaged and there is 1. “Settings.” an obstacle behind the vehicle, an will turn off. 2. “Driver Assistance.” acoustic signal with variable frequency will sound. 3. “ParkSense.” The acoustic signal increases in 4. “Mode.” frequency as the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle decreases. 5. “Sound-Display.” The acoustic signal becomes Visual Indications The system indicates the presence of an STARTING AND OPERATING continuous when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than obstacle by displaying a single red arc in 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the the detected area, in relation to the distance increases. distance of the object and the position of the vehicle. 07176S0052EM The acoustic signal is constant if the Park Sensors System On/Off Switch distance between the vehicle and the If the obstacle is detected in the rear The indicator light within the Park obstacle is unchanged. central area, a single red arc will be displayed as the obstacle approaches, Sensors System switch will also be on in Note: If several obstacles are detected case of system failure. If the switch is first constant, then flashing, in addition by the sensors, only the nearest one is to an acoustic signal. pushed with a system failure, the considered. indicator light will flash for If the obstacle is detected in the rear left approximately five seconds. The light will and/or right area, a single red flashing arc then stay on constantly. will be shown in the corresponding area Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, on the display and the system will emit an the Park Sensors System keeps the last acoustic signal, either at frequent state when the engine was stopped intervals or constantly. (activated or deactivated) in its memory. In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstacle when a single red flashing arc is shown on the display and the acoustic signal becomes continuous. 162 If several obstacles are detected Note: Some conditions may influence simultaneously in the rear area, the the performance of the Park Sensors Warning! display will show all of them, regardless System: of the area in which they were detected. Reduced sensor sensitivity could be It is not possible to exit from the display due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or Drivers must be careful when backing up screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. thick paint on the surface of the sensor. even when using the system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, Fault Indication The sensors may detect a false and be sure to check for pedestrians, Parking sensor faults, if any, will be obstacle (echo interference) due to animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a mechanical interference, for example blind spots before backing up. Youare message on the instrument cluster when washing the vehicle or in extreme responsible for the safety of your display. Refer to "Warning Lights And surroundings and must continue to pay weather. attention while backing up. Failure to do so Messages" in "Getting To Know Your can result in serious injury or death. Instrument Panel" for further The signals sent by the sensors can information. be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems Messages On The Display of or pneumatic drills) near the Caution! In case of system failure, a dedicated vehicle. message appears on the instrument System performance can be The Parking Sensor system is only a cluster for about five seconds. influenced by the position of the parking aid and it is unable to recognize Cleaning The Sensors: If the display sensors. For example, due to a change in every obstacle, including small obstacles. shows a message requiring the sensors the ride setting (caused by wear to the Parking curbs might be temporarily to be cleaned, make sure that the outer shock absorbers or suspension), by detected or not detected at all. Obstacles changing tires, overloading the vehicle or located above or below the sensors will not surface and the underside of the rear be detected when they are in close bumper is free of debris (e.g. snow, mud, operations that require the vehicle to be proximity ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear, lowered. cycle the ignition to the STOP position. The vehicle must be driven slowly when Be sure not to place bumper stickers using the Parking Sensor system in order to Then, return it to ON position. If the or other adhesives over the sensors as message is still displayed, contact an be able to stop in time when an obstacle is this will affect system performance. detected. It is recommended that the driver authorized dealer. looks over his/her shoulder when using the Audio System Not Available: If the Parking Sensor system. display shows a message that the audio system is not available, it means that the acoustic signal will be emitted by the instrument panel, and not through the vehicles speakers. 163 Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors Engagement/Disengagement Acoustic Signal The parking sensors, located in the front To turn the system off, push the Park In the presence of an obstacle at the and rear bumpers, detect the presence of Sensors System switch located to the front or the rear of the vehicle, an any obstacles and warn the driver left of the headlight switch. The indicator acoustic signal with variable frequency through an acoustic signal and visual light within the switch will illuminate will sound: when the system is turned off. Pushing indications will be displayed on the The acoustic signal increases in the switch a second time will turn the instrument cluster. frequency as the distance between the system back on, and the indicator light vehicle and the obstacle decreases. will turn off. The indicator light within the Park The acoustic signal becomes Sensors System switch will also be on in continuous when the distance between case of system failure. If the switch is the vehicle and the obstacle is less than pushed with a system failure, the 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the indicator light will flash for distance increases. approximately five seconds. The light will The acoustic signal is constant if the then stay on constantly. distance between the vehicle and the STARTING AND OPERATING Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, obstacle is unchanged. the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: If the sensors detect several front 07176S0003B state when the engine was stopped and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle Front Sensor Location (activated or deactivated) in its memory. is considered. An intermittent signal will System Activation/Deactivation sound if the obstacles are at the same When the REVERSE gear is engaged and distance (front and rear). the system is on, the front and rear When the system emits an acoustic sensors are activated. If the vehicle signal, the volume of the Information and moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, Entertainment System, if activated, is the rear sensors are deactivated, while automatically lowered. the front sensors remain active until the speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. Note: In certain operating conditions, the system could start detecting an obstacle 07176S0001B Rear Sensor Location only after the vehicle has moved slightly (a few inches).

164 Indication On Display In general, the vehicle is closer to the Note: Some conditions may influence The driver can select the type of warning obstacle when a single or several flashing the performance of the Park Sensors they would like to be displayed through arcs are shown on the display and the System: acoustic signal becomes continuous. the Information and Entertainment Reduced sensor sensitivity could be System. To access the function on the It is not possible to exit from the display due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or main menu, select in the following order: screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. thick paint on the surface of the sensor. 1. “Settings.” Fault Indication The sensors may detect a false Parking sensor faults, if any, will be 2. “Driver Assistance.” obstacle (echo interference) due to indicated by a message on the display on mechanical interference, for example 3. “ParkSense.” the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning when washing the vehicle or in extreme Lights And Messages" in "Getting To weather. 4. “Mode.” Know YourInstrument Panel" for further information. The signals sent by the sensors can 5. “Sound-Display.” be altered by the presence of ultrasonic Visual Indications Messages On The Display systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems The system indicates the presence of an In case of system failure, a dedicated of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the obstacle by displaying a single red arc in message appears on the instrument vehicle. the detected areas, in relation to the cluster for about five seconds. System performance can be distance of the object and the position of Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: influenced by the position of the the vehicle. If the display shows a message requiring sensors. For example, due to a change in If the obstacle is detected in the front or the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that the ride setting (caused by wear to the rear central area, a single red arc will be the outer surface and the underside of shock absorbers or suspension), by displayed as the obstacle approaches, the front and rear bumpers are free of changing tires, overloading the vehicle or first constant, then flashing, in addition debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once operations that require the vehicle to be to an acoustic signal. these areas are clear, cycle the ignition to lowered. If the obstacle is detected in the front or STOP.Then, return it to ON mode. If the Be sure not to place bumper stickers rear left and/or right area, a single red message is still displayed, contact an or other adhesives over the sensors as flashing arc will be shown in the authorized dealer. this will affect system performance. corresponding area on the display and Audio System Not Available: If the the system will emit an acoustic signal, display shows a message that the audio either at frequent intervals or constantly. system is not available, it means that the If several obstacles are detected acoustic signal will be emitted by the simultaneously in the front and rear area, instrument panel, and not through the the display will show all of them, vehicles speakers. regardless of the area in which they were detected. 165 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING Camera operation may also be Warning! (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, Description by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are Drivers must be careful when backing up The Lane Departure Warning system uses driving not aligned with yours, vehicle even when using the Parking Sensor system. a forward looking camera located on the driving in a transverse or opposite way on Always check carefully behind your vehicle, windshield to detect lane markings and the same lane, bend with a small radius of and be sure to check for pedestrians, curvature), by road surface conditions and measure vehicle position within the lane by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or boundaries. blind spots before backing up. Youare Make sure the windshield is always clean. responsible for the safety of your When one or both lane limits are Use specific detergents and clean cloths to surroundings and must continue to pay detected and the vehicle passes over one avoid scratching the windshield. The camera attention while backing up. Failure to do so without an activated turn signal, the operation may also be limited or absent in can result in serious injury or death. system emits a visual as well as an some driving, traffic and road surface audible signal. conditions. If the vehicle continues to go beyond the If the windshield must be replaced due to Caution! line of the lane without any intervention scratches, chipping or breakage, contact STARTING AND OPERATING from the driver, the surpassed line will exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not light up on the display (left or right) to replace the windshield on your own. It is The Parking Sensor system is only a advisable to replace the windshield if it is parking aid and it is unable to recognize urge the driver to bring the vehicle back damaged in the area of the camera. every obstacle, including small obstacles. into the limits of the lane. Parking curbs might be temporarily System Activation/Deactivation detected or not detected at all. Obstacles Caution! located above or below the sensors will not The system is activated/deactivated by be detected when they are in close proximity pushing the button located on the end of Do not tamper with nor operate on the the multifunction lever. The vehicle must be driven slowly when camera. Do not close the openings in the using the Parking Sensor system in order to aesthetic cover located under the interior be able to stop in time when an obstacle is rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of detected. It is recommended that the driver the camera, contact your authorized dealer. looks over his/her shoulder when using the The camera may have limited or absent Parking Sensor system. operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield.

166 Symbols And Messages On The Display Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit The Lane Departure Warning system advises the driver when the vehicle When the system is active and only, for leaves the driving lane by showing example, the left lane limit has been symbols and messages on the instrument detected, the detected lane illuminates in cluster display. white on the display; the system is ready to provide visual warnings on the display in the event of unintentional exiting of the lane (turn signal not activated) to the left.

07226S0001EM Lane Departure Warning System Activation/Deactivation Button Note: When the engine is started, the system maintains the operating mode that was selected when it was turned

OFF. 07226S0002EM Activation Conditions Vehicle Changing Lanes

Once turned on, the system becomes When the system is active and the lane 07226S0003EM active only if the following conditions are limits have not been detected, the display Left Lane Limit Detected met: shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey lines. When the system detects that the vehicle The vehicle speed is above 37 mph has approached the lane line and is about (60 km/h). to pass it, the left line on the display The lane limit lines are visible at least illuminates in yellow. on one side. There are suitable visibility conditions. The road is straight or with wide radius bends. A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in front. The turn signal is not active. 07226S0007EM Lane Limits Not Detected 167 When lane limits are detected, the To access the function, from the main system is ready to provide indications in menu select the following in order: case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated). 1. “Settings.” As the Lane Departure Warning system 2. “Safety.” detects the lane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display 3. “Lane Departure Warning.” accordingly (from white to yellow and 4. “Sensitivity.” vice versa, and increase their thickness). Limited Operation Warning

07226S0004EM If a message appears on the display, a Left Lane Limit Approached condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have The system operates in the same way, occurred. This could be an obstruction of but mirrored, in the event of exiting the the camera view, or a fault in the system. right lane when only the right lane limit If an obstruction is detected, clean the

STARTING AND OPERATING has been detected. area of the windshield by the interior rear Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both view mirror. Limits Although the vehicle can still be driven in

When the system is active, both lane lines 07226S0006EM normal conditions, the system may not on the display illuminate in white to Right Lane Limit Approached function properly. indicate the successful detection of both When the conditions limiting the system If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by limits. are corrected, it will go back to normal an audible signal as well as the visual operation. Should a fault persist, contact indication in the instrument cluster. The your authorized dealer. signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding If the system turns off and the warning the left line of the lane, the audible signal light appears on the display, it means will come from the speakers on the left of that there is a system fault. the vehicle). In this case, it is still possible to drive the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact The system's sensitivity can be set your authorized dealer as soon as through the Information and possible. 07226S0005EM Both Lane Limits Detected Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” can be selected. 168 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will DYNAMIC GRIDLINES activate the display of the dynamic guidelines that indicate the route of the Description vehicle while in REVERSE. The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the Warning! rear license plate.

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, 07186S000218 and be sure to check for pedestrians, Rear Back-Up Camera Display animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or Rear Back-Up Camera Features blind spots before backing up. Youare responsible for the safety of your To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera surroundings and must continue to pay features, select “Settings” from the Main attention while backing up. Failure to do so Menu of the Information and can result in serious injury or death. Entertainment System. 07186S0001EM Under “Driver Assistance” the following Rear Back-Up Camera Location features can be selected: Caution! When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the View Information and Entertainment System display will show the area behind the Camera Delay To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up Camera should only be used as a parking Camera Guidelines aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to Camera, along with a warning message. view every obstacle or object in your drive Selecting “View” will activate the camera path. view on the display. Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must camera view to remain on the display be driven slowly when using the Rear Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time shortly after the vehicle is no longer in when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended REVERSE, followed by the previously that the driver look frequently over his/her active screen. shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up Camera.

169 Symbols And Messages On The Display Messages On The Display REFUELING THE VEHICLE Indications On The Display If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will Refueling The Vehicle not detect any obstacle behind the Through the Information and vehicle. The display will show a dedicated Before refueling, make sure that the fuel Entertainment System settings, by warning message. type is correct. activating the "Camera Guidelines" feature, guidelines can be seen on the Make sure the trunk lid is closed by Also, stop the engine before refueling. rear camera display. If activated, the pushing next to the lock until it clicks. Note: An inefficient catalytic converter guidelines are positioned on the image to Important Notes leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus highlight the width of the vehicle and the contributing to air pollution. expected reverse path based on the Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the steering wheel position. camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to keep the camera surface Caution! A superimposed central line indicates the clean, and free from debris. center of the vehicle to assist in rear parking maneuvers. The various colored When parking, be aware of obstacles Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, areas indicate the distance from the rear that may be above or under the camera even in small amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the catalytic converter

STARTING AND OPERATING of the vehicle. range. beyond repair. The table below shows the approximate distances for each area: Refueling Capacity

Distance from the To ensure that you fill the tank Area rear of the vehicle completely, top off twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle. 0–11.8 inches Red Further top-off could cause faults in the (0–30 cm) fuel feeding system. 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet Yellow Refueling Procedure (30 cm–1 m) The fuel filler door is unlocked when the 3.3 feet or more Green central door locking system is unlocked. (1mormore) It is automatically locked when the central locking system is applied.

170 Opening The Fuel Filler Door The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline). To refuel proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on the point shown by the arrow. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a 07206S0002EM vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place Fuel Door Label gas containers on the ground while filling. Emergency Fuel Door Opening 07206S0001EM Fuel Door In the event of an emergency the fuel Note: If the filler compartment is filler door can be opened by operating 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. washed with a pressure washer, keep it at from inside the trunk. a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the Proceed as follows: filler pipe. 1. Open the trunk and locate the 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts emergency fuel filler release cap on the off, before removing the nozzle, wait for inside lining. at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank. 2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside to unlock the fuel filler door. 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing one click. This is an indication that cap is on it (see the previous instructions). properly tightened.

171 VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Curb Weight Certification Label The GAWR is the maximum permissible The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as As required by National Highway Traffic load on the front and rear axles. The load the total weight of the vehicle with all Safety Administration regulations, your must be distributed in the cargo area so fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full vehicle has a certification label affixed to that the GAWR of each axle is not capacity conditions, and with no the driver's side door or pillar. exceeded. occupants or cargo loaded into the Each axle GAWR is determined by the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight This label contains the month and year of values are determined by weighing your manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, vehicle on a commercial scale before any Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating occupants or cargo are added. (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or Identification Number (VIN). A suspension components sometimes Loading Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is specified by purchasers for increased included on this label and indicates the durability does not necessarily increase The actual total weight and the weight of Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The the vehicle's GVWR. the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by bar code that appears on the bottom of Tire Size STARTING AND OPERATING the label is your VIN. weighing it when it is loaded and ready The tire size on the Vehicle Certification for operation. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Label represents the actual tire size on The entire vehicle should first be weighed (GVWR) your vehicle. Replacement tires must be on a commercial scale to insure that the equal to the load capacity of this tire size. GVWR has not been exceeded. The The GVWR is the total permissible weight on the front and rear of the weight of your vehicle including driver, Rim Size vehicle should then be determined passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. separately to be sure that the load is The label also specifies maximum This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. properly distributed over the front and capacities of front and rear axle systems rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Inflation Pressure that the GAWR of either the front or rear GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not axles has been exceeded but the total exceeded. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for load is within the specified GVWR. If so, your vehicle for all loading conditions up Payload weight must be shifted from front to rear to full GAWR. or rear to front as appropriate until the The payload of a vehicle is defined as the specified weight limitations are met. allowable load weight a truck can carry, Store the heavier items down low and be including the weight of the driver, all sure that the weight is distributed passengers, options and cargo. equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. 172 Improper weight distributions can have TRAILER TOWING SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING an adverse effect on the way your vehicle Trailer towing is not recommended for Saving Fuel steers and handles and the way the this vehicle. brakes operate. Below are some suggestions which may help you save fuel and lower the amount of harmful emissions released into the Caution! atmosphere. Vehicle Maintenance Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Checks and operations should be carried GVWR or the maximum front and rear out in accordance with the Maintenance GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in handles. This could cause you to lose control. "Servicing And Maintenance" for further Also overloading can shorten the life of your information. vehicle. Tires Check the tire pressures at least once every four weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher. Unnecessary Loads Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. The weight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly affect fuel consumption and stability. Electric Devices Use electrical systems only for the amount of time needed. The rear window defroster, additional headlights, windshield wipers and heater blower fan require a considerable amount of energy; increasing the current uptake increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% when city driving).

173 Climate Control System Max. Speed Transporting Passengers Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant Warning! ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and emissions. It is extremely dangerous to leave Devices for Aerodynamic Control children in a parked vehicle when the The use of non-certified devices for Acceleration temperature outside is very high. The heat aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects inside the passenger compartment may affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration have serious, or even fatal, consequences. should be gradual and should not exceed Driving Style Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In the maximum torque. the event of an accident, anyone inside the Starting Conditions Of Use trunk would be at greater risk of serious or Do not warm up the engine at low or high even fatal injury. revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting Ensure that all the occupants of the causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and

STARTING AND OPERATING slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum that any children are positioned correctly on consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a the dedicated child restraint systems. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) Transporting Animals speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions. The intervention of the may be warm up more quickly. Traffic And Road Conditions dangerous for an animal on the front Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy seat. It is therefore advised to arrange Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in animals on the rear seat inside dedicated lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or cages restrained by the vehicle’s seat action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding belts. increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces Keep in mind that, in the event of a pollution. also adversely affect consumption. sudden braking or an accident, an inadequately restrained animal may be Gear Selection Stops In Traffic projected within the passenger Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway compartment, risking injury to the animal conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings) turn off the engine. itself and the other occupants of the faster acceleration will increase fuel vehicle. consumption. Improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. 174 Exhaust Gas Should an unusual noise from the exhaust system or the presence of exhaust gas in Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, the passenger compartment be and may be lethal. They contain carbon identified, or if the underbody or rear monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which section of the vehicle is damaged, have can cause fainting and poisoning if the entire exhaust system and bodywork inhaled. areas checked to identify any To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take components which are broken, damaged, the following measures: worn or have moved from their correct Do not keep the engine running in fitting position. If any of these things closed spaces. occur, contact your authorized dealer. If, for some reason (e.g. transporting Open welding or loose connections may bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with permit exhaust gas to enter the the trunk open, close all the windows and passenger compartment. run the climate control fan at maximum Check the exhaust system each time the speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil mode. change operations. Replace the components if necessary, contact your Should it be necessary to stay in the authorized dealer. stationary vehicle with engine running, adjust the ventilation/heating system and operate the fan in such a way that outside air will enter the passenger compartment. Activate the maximum fan speed. Maintenance of the exhaust system provides the best protection against leaks of carbon monoxide into the passenger compartment.

175 This page is intentionally left blank

176 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....178 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 178 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 183 JUMP STARTING ...... 189 The section on emergencies can help you REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....191 to deal with critical situations ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 192 independently. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .193 In an emergency, we recommend that you TOW EYES ...... 194 call the phone number found in the ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Warranty Book. SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 196 Youmay also consider contacting your EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .196 nearest authorized dealer.

177 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BULB REPLACEMENT The Hazard Warning switch is located in Caution! General Instructions the switch bank below the radio screen. Before replacing a bulb, check the Push the switch once to Prolonged use of the hazard warning contacts for oxidation. turn the hazard warning flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery. Replace blown bulbs with others of the flashers on. When the same type and power. switch is activated, all directional turn signals After replacing a headlight bulb, will flash on and off to always check its alignment. warn oncoming traffic When a light is not working, check that of an emergency. Push the switch a the corresponding fuse is intact before second time to turn the hazard warning changing the bulb. For the location of flashers off. fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. This is an emergency warning system and IN CASE OF EMERGENCY it should not be used when the vehicle is Note: In some particular climate in motion. Use it when your vehicle is conditions, such as low temperature, disabled and is creating a safety hazard humidity, or after washing the car, a thin for other motorists. condensation layer may form on the When you must leave the vehicle to seek internal surfaces of the front and rear assistance, the hazard warning flashers headlights. This condensation will will continue to operate even though the disappear after switching on the ignition is cycled to OFF. headlights.

08016S0001EM Hazard Warning Switch

178 Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

179 Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W Rear Fog lights H11 55 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W Glove compartment light W5W 4 W Trunk lid light W5W 5 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

180 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off Note: Only replace the bulb when the Caution! engine is off. Also ensure that the engine the headlight body. is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Direction Indicators Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb To change the bulb of these lights, life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily proceed as follows: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective Replacing Interior Bulbs cover. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

08026S0007EM 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the Bulb/Connector lens, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

08026S0023EM 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in Protective Cover Location the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is 2. Remove protective cover. locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. 08026S0008EM Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Sun Visor Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights 1 — Mirror Cover To replace the bulbs of the main beam 2 — Lens headlights, contact your authorized dealer. 2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened 08026S0006EM between the contacts. Protective Cover 181 3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. Glove Compartment Light To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: 1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, using a suitable tool.

08026S0011EM 08026S0010EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction Ceiling Light Indent 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is 2. Open protective cover up and remove correctly inserted fully. the bulb pulling out of the connector. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

08026S0009EM Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights Courtesy Lamp Indent To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: 3. Open protective cover up and remove 1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk the bulb pulling out of the connector. lamp assembly using a suitable tool.

08026S0011EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully.

182 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. FUSES 5. Install trunk lamp in the correct General Information position, inserting it firstly on one side, The fuses protect electrical systems and then pressing on the other side until against excessive current. it clicks into place. When a device does not work, you must Puddle Lights On Door Panel check the electrical circuit inside of the To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power 1. Open the door and remove the puddle outlets for extended periods of time with light assembly, using a suitable tool. 08026S0011EM the engine off may result in vehicle Cover And Bulb Removal Direction battery discharge. 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is 1 correctly inserted fully. 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 2 5. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. 3

08026S0012EM

Puddle Light Indent 0726067916 2. Open protective cover up and remove Blade Fuses the bulb pulling out of the connector. 1 — Electrical Circuit 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit

183 Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them, and extract the pliers pulling Warning! upwards. The pliers have two different ends, both of which are specifically designed to When replacing a blown fuse, always use remove the different types of fuses an appropriate replacement fuse with the present in the vehicle: same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity

08036S0002EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses J-CASE Fuse may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 1 — Electrical Circuit Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the ignition is off and that all the other cuit services are switched off and/or 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- disengaged. cuit 08036S0005EM If the replaced fuse blows again, contact Fuse Extracting Pliers an authorized dealer. Fuse Extracting Pliers 1 — MINI fuse If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked 2 — J-CASE fuse to the fuse box. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system After use, return the pliers to their proper blows, contact an authorized dealer. position by following the below procedures: Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert them into their housing. Push downward on the pliers into their housing until they click into place.

08036S0053EM Fuse Box

184 Fuse Location 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove The fuses, which can be replaced by the the panel pulling downward. user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the trunk. Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard To access the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the 08036S0014EM two buttons. Control Unit 08036S0011EM The fuses are freely accessible on the Release Hooks On Footboard control unit. The number identifying the electrical 2 — Panel component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. The fuses are freely accessible on the After replacing a fuse, make sure that control unit. you have closed cover correctly. After replacing the fuse, make sure that panel and footboard are correctly locked. Luggage Compartment Fuse Box 08036S0010EM To access the fuses, proceed as follows: Release Buttons On Footboard 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. 1 — Footboard 2. Remove the control unit cover.

185 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors F38 20 unlock, Central lock Windshield washer pump F43 20 186 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15

187 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40 Hi-Fi system F8 30 KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5 I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

188 JUMP STARTING The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock. If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Note: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions. 08076S0007EM Protective Flap Warning! 08076S0006EM Remote Negative Post Location

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and Warning! cause personal injury.

Do not connect the jumper cable to the Caution! negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in Do not use a portable battery booster pack serious injury. Only use the specific ground or any other booster source with a system point, do not use any other exposed metal 08076S000118 voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to parts. the battery, starter motor, alternator or Remote Positive Post Location electrical system may occur. To carry out the operation, you need to The positive post (+) can be accessed by have the correct cables to connect to the removing the cover, and opening the Remote Battery Connection Posts battery of another vehicle or a portable protective flap. battery booster pack to the remote posts The remote posts of the battery for jump of the discharged battery. Usually, these starting can be found inside the engine cables have terminals at the ends and are compartment. The battery itself is identified by different sheath colors located in the luggage compartment. (red = positive, black = negative).

189 Jump Starting Warning! Warning! Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as Do not connect the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this jump starting this could establish a ground connection and negative (-) post of the discharged battery. procedure could result in personal injury or personal injury could result. The resulting electrical spark could cause property damage due to battery explosion. the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground Cable Connection point, do not use any other exposed metal Caution! Proceed as follows to perform a jump parts. starting procedure: 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has Failure to follow these procedures could the booster battery, let the engine idle a result in damage to the charging system of jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. few minutes, and then start the engine in IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. the vehicle with the discharged battery. If 2. Connect the opposite end of the using a portable battery booster pack, positive (+) jumper cable to the positive before starting the vehicle, wait a few Preparation For Jump Starting: (+) post of the booster battery. seconds after completing the connection. 1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the the ignition to OFF. jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 2. Turn off all electrical features in the vehicle. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote 3. If using another vehicle to jump start negative (-) post of the discharged the battery, park the vehicle within the vehicle. jumper cables reach, apply the park brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

190 Cable Disconnection REFUELING IN EMERGENCY Once the engine is started, remove the Caution! Refueling in an emergency is described in connection cables in reverse sequence, "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And as described below: Operating". Accessories plugged into the vehicle power 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper outlets draw power from the vehicle’s cable from the remote negative (-) post battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular of the discharged vehicle. phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently jumper cable from the negative (-) post of to degrade battery life and/or prevent the the booster battery. engine from starting. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the Bump Starting positive (+) post of the booster battery. Never jump start the engine by pushing, 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the towing or coasting downhill. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of Note: Youcannot start a vehicle with an the vehicle with the discharged battery. automatic transmission by pushing it. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

191 ENGINE OVERHEATING Youcan also turn the temperature If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Engine overheating may occur in control to maximum heat, the mode Compartment situations of extreme environmental control to floor and the blower control to Do not go near the front of the vehicle. temperatures, frequent engine high. This allows the heater core to act Stop the engine. Wait until the steam stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If as a supplement to the radiator and aids dissipates. Then, open the hood and start the engine becomes overheated, the in removing heat from the engine cooling the engine. Engine TemperatureWarning Light in the system. If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is instrument cluster will illuminate along Escaping with a dedicated message. Refer to Warning! Open the hood and idle the engine until it "Warning Lights And Messages" in the cools. "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for more information. Youor others can be badly burned by hot Note: In any of the following situations, you can engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from If the cooling fan does not operate reduce the potential for overheating by your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the while the engine is running, the engine

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY taking the appropriate action. hood until the radiator has had time to cool. temperature will increase. Stop the On the highways — slow down. Never try to open a cooling system pressure engine and contact your authorized cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is dealer. In city traffic — while stopped, place hot. the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not If the engine continues to overheat or increase engine idle speed. frequently overheats, have the cooling system inspected. The engine could be Caution! Note: There are steps that you can take seriously damaged unless repairs are to slow down an impending overheat made. Contact your authorized dealer. condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge it off. The A/C system adds heat to the reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle engine cooling system and turning the the vehicle with the air conditioner turned A/C off can help remove this heat. off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

192 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The operators of the assistance vehicle must be informed with regard to the This section describes procedures for vehicle's minimum height from ground in towing a disabled vehicle using a order to avoid contact between the ends commercial towing service. of the bumpers with the equipment of the breakdown truck. Caution! The following image illustrates the front and rear attachment corners of the vehicle, to be taken into consideration The vehicle should be transported with all when loading the vehicle on the four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed assistance vehicle. of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted. When towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the body, it could damage the transmission. Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is 08126S0001EM released, and remain released, while being Front And Rear Loading Angles towed. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

RWD Models AWD Models A — Front Loading Angle 12.880° 15.160° B — Rear Loading Angle 17.105° 18.400°

193 Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models TOW EYES It is recommended to tow the vehicle It is recommended to tow the vehicle If the vehicle has been in an accident or with all four wheels OFF the ground on with all four wheels OFF the ground on has broken down, a tow eye is provided in the flatbed of a roadside assistance the flatbed of a roadside assistance the tools container located inside the vehicle. vehicle. luggage compartment for vehicle towing. There are two locations on the front Caution! Caution! bumper available for Tow Eye installation, and one in the rear on the passenger side. Towing is meant only for short distances Do not use sling type equipment when DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to on a paved road surface. towing. Vehicle damage may occur. the drivetrain will result. Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: When securing the vehicle to a flat bed DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a 1. Unhook the cap on the front (left or truck, do not attach to front or rear towing dolly can cause significant damage right side) or rear bumper, pushing on the suspension components. Damage to your to your vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY upper part. vehicle may result from improper towing. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is damage. Damage from improper towing is released, and remains released, while being not covered under the New Vehicle Limited towed. Warranty.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is not available, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels lifted from the ground using a trailer or special equipment allowing lifting of the rear wheels. 08136S0001B Front Tow Eye Cap Locations

194 Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device in accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service location. 08136S0003EM 08136S0002EM Rear Tow Eye Cap Location Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Work Angle Of Tow Cable vehicles off the road or where there are 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing obstacles. in the trunk and carefully clean the In compliance with the above conditions, threaded housing on the vehicle before Warning! towing with a tow eye must take place with using it. two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) 3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place aligned as much as possible along the same Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow center line. Damage to your vehicle may (about 11 turns). eyes. occur if these guidelines are not followed. Note: The largest work angle of a tow Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains cable to fix on the tow hook must not may break, causing serious injury or death. When towing, only use a facility that can exceed 15°. tow vehicles with low ground clearances as Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow extensive damage can result by using a straps may break or become disengaged, standard tow truck platform. causing serious injury or death. Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in serious injury or death.

195 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will Please refer to “Occupant Restraint assist in understanding how a vehicle’s Systems” in “Safety” for further systems performed under certain crash information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 198 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 202 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 205 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 206 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 212 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 212 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 229 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 230 BODYWORK...... 231 INTERIORS ...... 232

197 SCHEDULED SERVICING Periodic Checks The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Correct servicing is crucial for Every month or every 600 miles Scheduled Servicing Plan: guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check under the best conditions. and, if necessary, top off: Check cleanliness of hood and trunk For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned Engine coolant level. locks, cleanliness and lubrication of a series of checks and services for your linkage. Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see vehicle at fixed intervals based on Visually inspect conditions of: engine, distance and time, as described in the your authorized dealer as soon as possible). transmission, pipes and hoses Scheduled Servicing Plan. (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber Windshield washer fluid level. Before each service, it is always elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). necessary to carefully follow the Tire inflation pressure and condition. Check battery charge and battery fluid instructions in the Scheduled Servicing Operation of lighting system Plan (e.g. periodically check level of level (electrolyte). (headlights, direction indicators, hazard fluids, tire pressure, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of the warning lights, etc.). Scheduled Servicing is offered by an accessory drive belts. Operation of windshield authorized dealer according to a set time Check and, if necessary, change engine washing/wiping system and schedule. If, during each operation, in oil and replace oil filter. addition to the ones scheduled, the need positioning/wear of wiper blades. Check and, if necessary, replace cabin SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE arises for further replacements or Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and air filter. repairs, these may be carried out with the top off if required: owner’s explicit consent only. Check and, if necessary, replace air Engine oil level. Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are cleaner. required by the Manufacturer. Failure to Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle Severe Duty All Models have them carried out may invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If the vehicle is used under one of the Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles following conditions: (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a Youare advised to inform your Dusty roads. dusty and off-road environment or is authorized dealer of any small operating operated predominately at idle or only irregularities without waiting for the next Short, repeated journeys less than very low engine RPM’s. This type of service. 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. temperatures. Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity. In the event of a long period of inactivity. 198 Maintenance Plan (2.0 T4 MAir Engine) 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expire date Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● and, if equipped, engine oil degradation (2) Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.) Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact. (2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

199 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●● accessory drive belt(s) Change engine coolant ●

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3) Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ● Replace accessory drive belt/s (4) Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ●●●●● Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid (6)

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles. (4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). (6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 200 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement * ●●●●●

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). *The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

201 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.0 T4 MAir engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

09026S0002EM 1 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 –Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

202 Engine Oil The engine oil level can be seen on the Caution! Warning! instrument cluster display every time the engine is started, or on the Information and Entertainment system display by The oil level is not refreshed immediately on If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU the display after topping off. Consequently, the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil display and follow the procedure below. aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk Level”. of burns! Check on the display using the 6 notches Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is that the oil level is between the MIN and Caution! MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches removed to add oil to engine. Never run MAX level. the engine with cap removed this could If the oil level is close to or below the MIN cause oil to leak from engine. The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark, add oil gradually through the filler, Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update mark. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication On Display If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last Update On Display” in this section) If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, considering that each notch shown on the to ensure the correct indication of the oil go to your authorized dealer as soon as display corresponds to approximately level on the display, leave the vehicle on possible to have the oil in excess removed. 8.8floz(250ml). flat ground with the engine running for Do not add oil with specifications approximately 5 minutes (temperature different from those of the oil already in the Caution! higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the engine. engine off then proceed with the process Used engine oil and oil filters contain below: Make sure not to add too much oil when substances which are harmful to the topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess Start the engine again and idle it for environment. To change the oil and filters, may damage the engine. Have the vehicle about five minutes. we advise you to contact your authorized checked. Never exceed the MAX level when dealer. topping off engine oil. Note: If you have added the specified amount of oil and the indicator is not reading “Full”, please contact your authorized dealer.

203 Engine Coolant Fluid Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, Battery If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on The battery does not require the reservoir and add the fluid described in for a long time when the engine is not electrolyte to be topped up with distilled the "Technical Specifications" chapter. running. water. A periodic check carried out at an authorized dealer, however, is necessary Washer Fluid For Windshield Before performing any operation on to check efficiency. The windshield washer fluid reservoir has the electrical system, disconnect the Follow the battery manufacturer's a telescopic filler. negative battery cable. instructions for maintenance. If the level is too low, remove reservoir If you wish to install electrical cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid accessories after purchasing the car that Replacing The Battery described in the "Technical require permanent electrical supply (e.g. If necessary, replace the battery with Specifications" chapter. alarm, etc.), or accessories which another original battery with the same specifications. Follow the battery Brake Fluid influence the electrical supply requirements, contact your authorized manufacturer’s instructions for Check that the fluid is at the maximum dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate maintenance. level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, the overall electrical consumption. contact your authorized dealer to have the system checked. Warning! Caution! Automatic Transmission Activation SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE System Oil Battery acid is a corrosive solution and If the charge level remains under 50% for a can burn or even blind you. Do not allow The transmission control oil level should battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or only be checked at your authorized long time, the battery may be damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity and clothing. Do not lean over a battery when dealer. efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with Useful Advice For Extending The Life also more prone to the risk of freezing (at temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Of YourBattery Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for To avoid draining your battery and make further information. it last longer, observe the following Note: After the battery is disconnected, Battery gas is flammable and explosive. instructions: the steering must be initialized. The Keep flame or sparks away from the warning light on the instrument panel When you park the car, ensure that the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any switches on to indicate this. To carry out other booster source with an output greater doors and trunk are closed properly to this procedure, simply turn the steering than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to prevent any lights from remaining on wheel all the way from one end to the touch each other. inside the passenger's compartment. other, and then turn it back to the central position.

204 Battery posts, terminals, and related BATTERY RECHARGING accessories contain lead and lead Important Notes compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Note: It will not be possible to open the Warning! trunk with a key or by pressing the button in the passenger compartment when the Never charge or recharge a frozen battery is disconnected. So, always battery: it may explode because of the position the manual trunk opening strap nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. on the trunk lock before disconnecting the battery. The procedure is described in At all times while charging or recharging 09036S0001EM the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in the battery, make sure that any sparks or Battery Access Panel open flames are kept sufficiently far away this chapter. from the battery. Remove the protective cover and connect the positive cable terminal of the charger (usually red) to the positive Note: terminal (+) of the battery. Before using the charging device, Connect the negative terminal of the always make sure that it is appropriate charger (usually black) to nut next to the for the installed battery, with constant negative terminal (-) of the battery. voltage (below 14.8 V) and low amperage (maximum 15 A). Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment. Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions provided with the device in order to properly and safely connect it to the car battery. Youcan recharge the battery without 09036S0002EM Battery disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's electrical system. 1 — Protective Cover To reach the battery, remove the 2 — Negative Post (Nut) access panel inside the trunk. 205 The vehicle is equipped with an IBS DEALER SERVICE Changing The Engine Oil (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able The following pages contain instructions See the "Maintenance Plan" for the to measure the charge and discharge on the required maintenance from the correct servicing intervals. voltage and calculate the charge level technical personnel who designed the Choice Of Engine Oil Type and the general condition of the battery. vehicle. The sensor is placed next to the negative To ensure optimal performance and In addition to these specific maintenance terminal (-) of the battery. maximum protection in all operating instructions specified for routine For a correct charge/discharge conditions, it is advisable to use solely scheduled servicing, there are other certified engine oils (see description in procedure, the charge voltage must go components which may require periodic through the IBS sensor. "Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical maintenance or replacement over the Specifications" chapter). 1. Turn the charger on and follow the vehicle’s life cycle. Additives For Engine Oil instructions on the user's manual to Engine Oil completely recharge the battery. It is strongly recommended not to use Engine Oil Level Check additives (other than leak detection dyes) 2. When the battery is charged, turn the To ensure correct engine lubrication, the with the engine oil. charger off before disconnecting it from oil must always be kept at the prescribed The engine oil is a product designed the battery. level (see "Engine Compartment" in this specially for the vehicle and its 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of chapter). performance may be deteriorated

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the battery charger and then the red Check the oil level at regular intervals, for through the use of further additives. cable terminal. example every 1864 miles (3000 km). Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters It must be checked once full operating 4. Refit the protective cover of the For the disposal of the engine oil and temperature is reached. positive terminal of the battery and the filters, contact the appropriate body to access cover to the battery The vehicle must also be parked on as determine local regulations. compartment. level a surface as possible. Note: Used engine oil disposed of The engine oil level can be checked using Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is incorrectly may seriously harm the the Information and Entertainment used with the battery fitted on the environment. system. To access the function, activate vehicle, before connecting it disconnect the main menu (MENU button) and select both cables of the battery itself. Do not the following options in sequence: use a "quick-type" battery charger to “Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil level”. provide the starting voltage.

206 Engine Oil Filter Lubricate the external lock barrels twice a year. Apply a small amount of Replacing The Engine Oil Filter Warning! high-quality lubricant directly into the The engine oil filter must be replaced lock barrel. each time the engine oil is changed. It is Use only refrigerants and compressor If necessary, contact your authorized advised to replace it with a genuine spare lubricants approved by the manufacturer for dealer as soon as possible. part, specifically designed for this your air conditioning system. Some vehicle. unapproved refrigerants are flammable and Windshield Wiper Air Filter can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved Periodically clean the windshield and rear refrigerants or lubricants can cause the window and rubber profile of the Replacing The Air Cleaner system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer windshield wiper blades, using a sponge See the "Maintenance Plan" for the to Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s information kit, for further or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive correct servicing intervals. It is advised to warranty information. detergent. This eliminates the salt or replace it with a genuine spare part, impurities accumulated when driving. specifically designed for this vehicle. Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Prolonged operation of the windshield Air Conditioning System Maintenance Bodywork window wipers with dry glass may cause the deterioration of the blades, in To ensure the best possible performance, Ensure that the locks and bodywork addition to abrasion of the surface of the the air conditioning system must be junction points, including components glass. To eliminate the impurities on the checked and undergo maintenance at an such as the seat guides, door hinges (and dry glass, always operate the windshield authorized dealer at the beginning of the rollers), trunk and hood are periodically washers. summer. lubricated with lithium-based grease to In the event of very low outdoor ensure correct, silent operation and to temperatures, below zero degrees, Caution! protect them from rust and wear. ensure that the movement of the rubber Thoroughly clean the components, part in contact with the glass is not eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. obstructed. Use a suitable deicing Do not use chemicals to clean the air After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and product to release it if required. conditioning system, since the internal grease. Also pay particular attention to components may be damaged. This kind of Avoid using the windshield wipers to damage is not covered by warranty. the hood closing devices, to ensure remove frost or ice. correct operation. During operations on the hood, to be carried out with the Also avoid contact of the rubber profile Replace The Cabin Air Filter engine cold, also remember to check, of the blades with petroleum derivatives such as engine oil, gas, etc. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the clean and lubricate the locking, release correct servicing intervals. For cleaner and safety devices. replacement, contact an authorized dealer. 207 To activate this function, move the lever Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades upward for at least three seconds. Warning! Proceed as follows: 1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is attachment spring and remove the blade a serious hazard, because visibility is from the arm. reduced in bad weather conditions.

Note: The life of the windshield wiper blades varies according to the usage frequency. In any case, it is advised to replace the blades approximately once a year. When the blades are worn, noise, 09046S0001EM marks on the glass or streaks of water Windshield Wiper Stalk may be noticed. In the presence of these conditions, clean the windshield wiper Function Deactivation blades or, if necessary, replace them. The function is deactivated if: 09046S0002EM Wiper Release Tab Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades More than two minutes passes before

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ("Service Position" Function) cycling the ignition to the STOP position 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in The "service position" function allows the after having raised the lever and putting the dedicated housing in the arm and driver to replace the windshield wiper the wipers into service position. checking that it is locked. blades more easily. It is also The ignition is cycled to the ON 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the recommended to activate this function position and the windshield wiper control windshield. when it is snowing and to make it easier is used. to remove any dirt deposits in the area Note: Do not operate the windshield where the blades are normally If, after using the function, the ignition is wiper with the blades lifted from the positioned, when washing. set back to ON with the blades in a windshield. position other than rest position (at the Windshield Washer Activation Of The Function base of the windshield), they will only The window washer nozzles are fixed. If To activate this function, disable the return to rest position following a there is no jet of fluid, first check that windshield wiper before setting the command given using the stalk (stalk there is fluid in the reservoir (see ignition device to STOP. upwards, into unstable position) or when paragraph “Engine Compartment” in this a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. This function can only be activated within chapter). two minutes of cycling the ignition to STOP. 208 Open welding or loose connections may A hot exhaust system can start a fire if permit exhaust gas to enter the you park over materials that can burn. Such passenger compartment. materials might be grass or leaves coming Have the exhaust system checked every into contact with your exhaust system. Do time the vehicle is raised. Replace the not park or operate your vehicle in areas components where necessary (for these where your exhaust system can contact operations, contact an authorized anything that can burn. dealer). In normal operating conditions, the Cooling System catalytic converter does not require 09046S0003EM maintenance. To ensure that it operates Warning! Windshield Washers correctly, however, and prevent it from getting damaged, it is extremely 1 — Washer Nozzles important that the engine operates Youor others can be badly burned by hot perfectly. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from Then, check that the nozzle holes are not To minimize the risk of damaging the your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the clogged; use a needle to unblock them if catalytic converter, proceed as follows: hood until the radiator has had time to cool. necessary. Do not stop the engine or deactivate Never open a cooling system pressure cap Exhaust System the ignition with gear engaged and when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. vehicle in motion. Adequate maintenance of the engine Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the exhaust system represents the best Do not attempt to start the engine by bump starting. hood is raised. The fan starts automatically protection against leaks of carbon and may start at any time, whether the monoxide into the passenger Do not persist in using the vehicle if engine is running or not. compartment. idling is very irregular or the operating When working near the radiator cooling If an unusual noise from the exhaust or conditions are very notably irregular. fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the presence of smoke in the passenger the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is compartment is identified, or if the temperature controlled and can start at any underbody or rear section of the vehicle time the ignition is in the ON mode. Warning! have been damaged, have the entire exhaust system and adjoining bodywork areas checked at your authorized dealer Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They to identify any components which are contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is broken, damaged, worn or have moved colorless and odorless. Breathing it can from their correct fitting position. make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. 209 Coolant Check Note: Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and Warning! For topping up, use a fluid with the they both need to be checked to ensure same characteristics as those indicated they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see “Engine Compartment” section for the Do not open hot engine cooling system. "Technical Specifications" chapter). locations. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when Do not use pure water, alcohol-based Check the engine coolant and intercooler the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated coolants, corrosions inhibitors or coolant level every oil change or before engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in long trips. additional anti-rust products because the cooling system. To prevent scalding or they may be incompatible with the If there are impurities in the engine injury, do not remove the pressure cap while coolant, the system must be drained, the system is hot or under pressure. engine coolant and cause the clogging of the radiator. The use of propylene flushed and refilled: contact an Do not use a pressure cap other than the authorized dealer. one specified for your vehicle. Personal glycol-based coolant is also not Check the front part of the condenser to injury or engine damage may result. recommended. check for any build-up of insects, leaves Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it Note: Before removing the coolant by spraying delicately with water. To prevent loss of engine coolant, make reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool sure that the expansion tank cap is Check the hoses of the engine/ down. closed. If it is open, screw it completely SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE intercooler cooling system to ensure that until you reach/hear the click. the rubber has not deteriorated and that Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The there are no cracks, tears, cuts or Engine/Intercooler Coolant Periodically check the cap and clean it obstructions in the expansion tank side If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, from any foreign bodies that may have and radiator side connectors. Should have cleaning and flushing carried out at deposited on the external surface. there be any doubt regarding leaks from an authorized dealer. the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are See the "Maintenance Plan" for the required), have the seal checked at an correct servicing intervals. Warning! authorized dealer. With the engine off and at normal Never add coolant with the engine hot or operating temperature, check that the overheated. cooling system radiator cap is closed Do not attempt to cool an overheated properly. engine by loosening or removing the cap. The heat causes a considerable increase in pressure in the cooling system. To prevent damage to the engine, only use the engine cooling circuit caps provided. 210 Disposal of Used Coolant accidents. When driving, never keep your Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is foot on the brake pedal and don’t put result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine subject to legal requirements: contact unnecessary strain on it to prevent the parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. the appropriate body to determine local brakes from overheating: excess pad Brake fluid can also damage painted and regulations. wear may cause damage to the braking vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid system. its contact with these surfaces. Note: When an insufficient oil level is Do not allow petroleum based fluid to To prevent the fluid from being detected, contact an authorized dealer contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal ingested by children or animals, do not to have the system checked. components could be damaged, causing keep it in open containers or pour it on partial or complete brake failure. This could Always keep the cap of the brake result in a collision. the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor fluid reservoir (in the engine immediately. Eliminate any traces of compartment) completely closed. fluid from the ground immediately. Automatic Transmission When the vehicle stops after a short Use only a transmission oil with the same characteristics as those indicated in the trip, steam may be seen coming out Warning! from front of the hood. This is a normal "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see phenomenon which is due to the "Technical Specifications" chapter). presence of rain, snow or a lot of Use only manufacturer's recommended Special Additives moisture on the surface of the radiator. brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further Do not use any type of additive with the With engine and system cold, do not information. Using the wrong type of brake automatic transmission oil. The top up with coolant beyond the fluid can severely damage your brake automatic transmission oil is a product maximum level indicated on the system and/or impair its performance. The designed specially for this vehicle and its proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is reservoir in the engine compartment. performance may be compromised also identified on the original factory through the use of further additives. installed hydraulic master cylinder Braking System reservoir. Caution! In order to guarantee the efficiency of To avoid contamination from foreign the braking system, periodically check its matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid components; for this operation, contact or fluid that has been in a tightly closed Do not use chemical flushes in your container. Keep the master cylinder an authorized dealer. transmission as the chemicals can damage reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake See the "Maintenance Plan" for the your transmission components. Such fluid in a open container absorbs moisture correct servicing intervals. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. Limited Warranty. Note: Driving with your foot resting on This may cause it to boil unexpectedly the brake pedal may compromise its during hard or prolonged braking, resulting efficiency, increasing the risk of in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. 211 Frequency of Oil Changes RAISING THE VEHICLE TIRES In normal vehicle operating conditions, it If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an Tire Safety Information is not necessary to change the authorized dealer which is equipped with transmission oil. shop jacks or jack arms. Tire safety information will cover aspects The vehicle lifting points are marked on of the following information: Tire the side skirts with the symbols. Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Caution! Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an Tire Markings authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Replacing The Battery If necessary, replace the battery with another battery with the same 09056S0001EM specifications. It is advised to contact an Vehicle Lift Point Locations SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE authorized dealer for replacement. 0601085395US Follow the battery manufacturer's Tire Markings instructions for maintenance. Note: It will not be possible to open the 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum trunk with a key or by pressing the button Safety Standards Load in the passenger compartment when the Code (TIN) 5 — Maximum battery is disconnected. So, always 2 — Size position the manual trunk opening strap Pressure on the trunk lock before disconnecting Designation 6 — Treadwear, the battery. The procedure is described in 3 — Service Traction and the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this Description Temperature chapter. Grades

212 Note: beginning with the section width. The Temporary spare tires are designed letter "P" is absent from this tire size for temporary emergency use only. P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. Temporary high pressure compact spare based on U.S. design standards. tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is into the sidewall preceding the size into the sidewall preceding the size based on U.S. design standards. The size designation. Example: T145/ designation. Example: P215/ designation for LT-Metric tires is the 80D18 103M. 65R15 95H. same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the High flotation tire sizing is based on European — Metric tire sizing is sidewall preceding the size designation. U.S. design standards and it begins with based on European design standards. Example: LT235/85R16. the tire diameter molded into the Tires designed to this standard have the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. tire size molded into the sidewall Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

213 EXAMPLE: R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

214 Tire Identification Number (TIN) sidewalls will have the full TIN, including is not found on the outboard side, then the date code, located on the white you will find it on the inboard side of the The TIN may be found on one or both sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN tire. sides of the tire; however, the date code on the outboard side of black sidewall may only be on one side. Tires with white tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

215 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a Cold Tire Inflation Pressure minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Note: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the

recommended pressure for your vehicle. 0806115150US 0806115151US Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

216 Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load The vehicle maximum load on the tire Limit— must not exceed the load carrying (1) Locate the statement “The capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You combined weight of occupants and will not exceed the tire's load carrying cargo should never exceed XXX kg or capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. inflation pressures specified on the Tire (2) Determine the combined weight and Loading Information placard in of the driver and passengers that will “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And be riding in your vehicle. GUID-054900418-high.tif Operating” section of this manual. Tire And Loading Information Placard Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle (3) Subtract the combined weight of This placard tells you important condition, gross axle weight ratings the driver and passengers from XXX information about the: (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles kg or XXX lbs. 1. Number of people that can be carried must not be exceeded. For further (4) The resulting figure equals the in the vehicle. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle available amount of cargo and 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” luggage load capacity. For example, section of this manual. if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading there will be five 150 lb passengers 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the conditions of your vehicle, locate the in your vehicle, the amount of front, rear, and spare tires. statement “The combined weight of available cargo and luggage load occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 and Loading Information placard. The (5x150) = 650 lbs.) combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

217 (5) Determine the combined weight is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as of luggage and cargo being loaded on shown in step 4. the vehicle. That weight may not Note: safely exceed the available cargo and If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, luggage load capacity calculated in load from your trailer will be transferred Step 4. to your vehicle. The following table (6) If your vehicle will be towing a shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing trailer, load from your trailer will be capacities of your vehicle with varying transferred to your vehicle. Consult seating configurations and number and this manual to determine how this size of occupants. This table is for reduces the available cargo and illustration purposes only and may not luggage load capacity of your vehicle. be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if “XXX” amount equals For the following example, the 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg combined weight of occupants and passengers in your vehicle, the amount of cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE available cargo and luggage load capacity (392 kg).

218 GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

219 Tires — General Information Unequal tire pressures from one side of Tire Inflation Pressures the vehicle to the other can cause the Tire Pressure vehicle to drift to the right or left. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Always drive with each tire inflated to the edge of the driver's side door. to the safe and satisfactory operation of recommended cold tire inflation pressure. your vehicle. Four primary areas are At least once a month: affected by improper tire pressure: Check and adjust tire pressure with a Both under-inflation and over-inflation good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Safety and Vehicle Stability affect the stability of the vehicle and can Do not make a visual judgement when produce a feeling of sluggish response or Economy determining proper inflation. Tires may over responsiveness in the steering. Tread Wear look properly inflated even when they are Note: under-inflated. Ride Comfort Unequal tire pressures from side to Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Safety side may cause erratic and visible damage. unpredictable steering response. Warning! Unequal tire pressure from side to Caution! side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Improperly inflated tires are dangerous After inspecting or adjusting the tire and can cause collisions. Fuel Economy pressure, always reinstall the valve stem Underinflation increases tire flexing and Underinflated tires will increase tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from can result in overheating and tire failure. rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to consumption. cushion shock. Objects on the road and Tread Wear chuckholes can cause damage that result in Improper cold tire inflation pressures can Inflation pressures specified on the tire failure. cause abnormal wear patterns and placard are always “cold tire inflation Overinflated or underinflated tires can reduced tread life, resulting in the need pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is affect vehicle handling and can fail for earlier tire replacement. defined as the tire pressure after the suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Proper tire inflation contributes to a (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of problems. Youcould lose control of your comfortable ride. Over-inflation vehicle. three hours. The cold tire inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable pressure must not exceed the maximum ride. inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. 220 Check tire pressures more often if are such that the vehicle can be driven at And Loading Information Placard located subject to a wide range of outdoor high speeds, maintaining correct tire on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge temperatures, as tire pressures vary with inflation pressure is very important. of the driver's side door. temperature changes. Increased tire pressure and reduced When driving at speeds 100 mph Tire pressures change by approximately vehicle loading may be required for (160 km/h) and above, increased tire 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to pressures and reduced vehicle loading temperature change. Keep this in mind your authorized tire dealer or original are required for high-speed vehicle when checking tire pressure inside a equipment vehicle dealer for operation. garage, especially in the Winter. recommended safe operating speeds, For driving speeds above 100 mph Example: If garage temperature = 68°F loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (160 km/h) recommended cold tire (20°C) and the outside temperature = inflation pressures are listed below 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation Warning! under "High Speed Tire Inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + every 12°F (7°C) for this outside High speed driving with your vehicle under three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) temperature condition. maximum load is dangerous. The added luggage). strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to Youcould have a serious collision. Do not 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum NOT reduce this normal pressure build up capacity at continuous speeds above Warning! or your tire pressure will be too low. 75 mph (120 km/h). Tire Pressures For High Speed High speed driving with your vehicle under Operation Recommended Cold Tire Inflation maximum load is dangerous. The added Pressures strain on your tires could cause them to fail. The manufacturer advocates driving at For vehicle speeds below 100 mph Youcould have a serious collision. safe speeds and within posted speed (160 km/h), recommended cold tire limits. Where speed limits or conditions inflation pressures are listed on the Tire

221 Recommended Cold High Speed Tire Tire Inflation Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear 225/50R17 94V M+S 32 psi/ 35 psi/ 39 psi/ 44 psi/ 17x7.5J Runflat 220kpa 240kpa 270kpa 300kpa 225/45R18 91V M+S 32 psi/ 35 psi/ 39 psi/ 44 psi/ 18x8J Runflat 220kpa 240kpa 270kpa 300kpa 225/40R19 93V XL M+S 35 psi/ 38 psi/ 39 psi/ 42 psi/ Original Equippment 19x8J Runflat 240kpa 260kpa 270kpa 290kpa 35 psi/ 39 psi/ 225/40R19 89W Runflat 19x8J – – 240kpa 270kpa 34 psi/ 42 psi/ 255/35R19 92W Runflat 19x9J – – 230kpa 290kpa 225/50R17 94V M+S 32 psi/ 35 psi/ 39 psi/ 44 psi/ 17x7.5J SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Runflat 220kpa 240kpa 270kpa 300kpa Snow Tires 225/45R18 91V M+S 32 psi/ 35 psi/ 39 psi/ 44 psi/ 18x8J Runflat 220kpa 240kpa 270kpa 300kpa

Radial Ply Tires Tire Repair Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repairs and additional information. repaired if it meets the following criteria: Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires Warning! that have experienced a loss of pressure The tire has not been driven on when should be replaced immediately with flat. Combining radial ply tires with other types another Run Flat tire of identical size and of tires on your vehicle will cause your The damage is only on the tread service description (Load Index and vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could section of your tire (sidewall damage is Speed Symbol). cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires not repairable). in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

222 Run Flat Tires — If Equipped These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will Warning! Run Flat tires allow you the capability to appear as bands when the tread depth drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces When the tread is worn to the tread wear pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is generated by excessive wheel speeds may indicators, the tire should be replaced. referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run cause tire damage or failure. A tire could Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation explode and injure someone. Do not spin section for further information. pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds Life Of Tire mode it has limited driving capabilities continuously when you are stuck, and do not and needs to be replaced immediately. A let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter The service life of a tire is dependent Run Flat tire is not repairable. what the speed. upon varying factors including, but not limited to: It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer Tread Wear Indicators Driving style. while a tire is in the run flat mode. Tread wear indicators are in the original Tire pressure - Improper cold tire See the tire pressure monitoring section equipment tires to help you in inflation pressures can cause uneven for more information. determining when your tires should be wear patterns to develop across the tire Tire Spinning replaced. tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice earlier tire replacement. conditions, do not spin your vehicle's Distance driven. wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously Performance tires, tires with a speed without stopping. rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. 0806104865NA Tire Tread 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire

223 See the Tire Sizing Chart example found Never use a tire with a smaller load index in the “Tire Safety Information” section of Warning! or capacity, other than what was originally this manual for more information relating equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a smaller load index could result in tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced tire. overloading and failure. Youcould lose after six years, regardless of the remaining It is recommended to replace the two control and have a collision. tread. Failure to follow this warning can front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose Replacing just one tire can seriously having adequate speed capability can result control and have a collision resulting in affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle serious injury or death. replace a wheel, make sure that the control. wheel’s specifications match those of the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place original wheels. with as little exposure to light as It is recommended you contact an Caution! possible. Protect tires from contact with authorized tire dealer or original oil, grease, and gasoline. equipment dealer with any questions you Replacing original tires with tires of a Replacement Tires may have on tire specifications or different size may result in false capability. Failure to use equivalent speedometer and odometer readings. The tires on your new vehicle provide a replacement tires may adversely affect balance of many characteristics. They the safety, handling, and ride of your SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Spare Tires — If Equipped should be inspected regularly for wear vehicle. and correct cold tire inflation pressures. Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire The manufacturer strongly recommends Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please that you use tires equivalent to the Warning! refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of originals in size, quality and performance Emergency” for further information. when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for Caution! this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading your vehicle. Some combinations of Information placard or the Vehicle unapproved tires and wheels may change Certification Label for the size suspension dimensions and performance Because of the reduced ground clearance, designation of your tire. The Load Index characteristics, resulting in changes to do not take your vehicle through an and Speed Symbol for your tire will be steering, handling, and braking of your automatic car wash with a compact or found on the original equipment tire vehicle. This can cause unpredictable limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. sidewall. handling and stress to steering and suspension components. Youcould lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. 224 Spare Tire Matching Original Do not install more than one compact limited use spare wheel. This label Equipped Tire And Wheel — If spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any contains the driving limitations for this Equipped given time. spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of Yourvehicle may be equipped with a your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of spare tire and wheel equivalent in look Warning! this limited use spare tire affects vehicle and function to the original equipment handling. Since it is not the same as your tire and wheel found on the front or rear original equipment tire, replace (or axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may Compact and collapsible spares are for repair) the original equipment tire and be used in the tire rotation for your temporary emergency use only. With these reinstall on the vehicle at the first spares, do not drive more than 50 mph opportunity. vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have refer to an authorized tire dealer for the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to recommended tire rotation pattern. the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to Warning! Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped follow the warnings, which apply to your The compact spare is for temporary spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Limited use spares are for emergency use emergency use only. Youcan identify if only. Installation of this limited use spare your vehicle is equipped with a compact tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, spare by looking at the spare tire Full Size Spare — If Equipped do not drive more than the speed listed on description on the Tire and Loading the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to Information Placard located on the The full size spare is for temporary the cold tire inflation pressures listed on driver’s side door opening or on the emergency use only. This tire may look your Tire and Loading Information Placard sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire like the originally equipped tire on the located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the descriptions begin with the letter “T” or front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace not. This spare tire may have limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the “S” preceding the size designation. first opportunity and reinstall it on your Example: T145/80D18 103M. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since this tire has limited tread life, the Since it is not the same as your original original equipment tire should be equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Wheel And Wheel Trim Care repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on original equipment tire and reinstall on All wheels and wheel trim, especially your vehicle at the first opportunity. the vehicle at the first opportunity. aluminum and chrome plated wheels, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to should be cleaned regularly using mild mount a conventional tire on the compact Limited Use Spare — If Equipped (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain spare wheel, since the wheel is designed The limited use spare tire is for their luster and to prevent corrosion. specifically for the compact spare tire. temporary emergency use only. This tire Wash wheels with the same soap solution is identified by a label located on the recommended for the body of the vehicle 225 and remember to always wash when the Tire Types surfaces are not hot to the touch. Caution! All Season Tires — If Equipped Yourwheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium All Season tires provide traction for all chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and chloride, etc., and other road chemicals bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Winter). Traction levels may vary used to melt ice or control dust on dirt These products may damage the wheel's between different all season tires. All roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild protective finish. Such damage is not season tires can be identified by the M+S, soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Wheel M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets damage the wheel’s protective coating of four; failure to do so may adversely that helps keep them from corroding and affect the safety and handling of your tarnishing. Note: If you intend parking or storing vehicle. your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Caution! drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Equipped remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will Summer tires provide traction in both Avoid products or automatic car washes wet and dry conditions, and are not that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline remove the red rust on the brake rotors SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE additives or harsh brushes. Many and prevent vehicle vibration when intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic braking. your vehicle is equipped with Summer car washes may damage the wheel's Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin tires, be aware these tires are not protective finish. Such damage is not Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels designed for Winter or cold driving covered by the New Vehicle Limited conditions. Install Winter tires on your Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel vehicle when ambient temperatures are Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Caution! less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more When cleaning extremely dirty wheels information, contact an authorized If your vehicle is equipped with these dealer. including excessive brake dust, care must specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. Summer tires do not contain the all cleaning chemicals and equipment to They will permanently damage this finish season designation or mountain/ prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar and such damage is not covered by the New snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH Use Summer tires only in sets of four; Cleaner or their equivalent is ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH failure to do so may adversely affect the recommended or select a non-abrasive, A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this safety and handling of your vehicle. non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or is all that is required to maintain this finish. chrome wheels. 226 While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction Warning! Caution! capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice Some states prohibit studded tires; To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, therefore, local laws should be checked observe the following precautions: resulting in severe injury or death. Driving before using these tire types. Because of restricted traction device too fast for conditions also creates the clearance between tires and other possibility of loss of vehicle control. Tire Chains (Traction Devices) suspension components, it is important that Use of traction devices require sufficient only traction devices in good condition are tire-to-body clearance. Follow these used. Broken devices can cause serious Snow Tires recommendations to guard against damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if damage. noise occurs that could indicate device Some areas of the country require the breakage. Remove the damaged parts of use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow Note: the device before further use. tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire Traction device must be of proper Install device as tightly as possible and sidewall. size for the tire, as recommended by the then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). If you need snow tires, traction device manufacturer select tires equivalent Use on Rear Tires Only Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). in size and type to the Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns original equipment Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are and large bumps, especially with a loaded tires. Use snow tires vehicle. only in sets of four; recommended: Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry failure to do so may For a 255/35R19 tire, use of a snow pavement. adversely affect the safety and handling traction device with a maximum of your vehicle. projection of 7 mm beyond the tire Observe the traction device Snow tires generally have lower speed profile is recommended. manufacturer’s instructions on the method ratings than what was originally equipped of installation, operating speed, and For 225/50R17, 225/45R18 or with your vehicle and should not be conditions for use. Always use the 225/40R19 tires, use of a snow traction suggested operating speed of the device operated at sustained speeds over device with a maximum projection of manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 9 mm beyond the tire profile is (48 km/h). 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original recommended. equipment or an authorized tire dealer Do not use traction devices on a compact for recommended safe operating speeds, spare tire. loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

227 Tire Rotation Recommendations Tires on the front and rear axles of Caution! vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, Damage to the vehicle may occur if they wear at unequal rates. These effects 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear tires are rotated can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. Rotation will increase tread life, maintain traction levels and contribute to Tire rotation contributes to the a smooth, quiet ride. preservation of the grip and traction To resolve this problem, tires should be performance on wet, muddy or snowy 09066S0002EM rotated at each service interval roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability Tire Rotation of the vehicle. (approximately every 10,000 miles All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models [16,000km]). More frequent rotation is In the case of irregular wear of the tires It is recommended to avoid situations permissible if desired. The reasons for identify the cause and correct it as soon with a large difference in wear between any rapid or unusual wear should be as possible, by contacting an authorized the front and rear tires and to strictly use corrected prior to rotation being dealer. winter tires of the sizes given on the tire performed. Tire Rotation for Directional Tires — If placard. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If Equipped The AWD system and the original tires Equipped Directional tires are equipped on the are developed together to ensure the Due to different size tires and wheels on following: vehicle’s best performance. When front and rear axles tire rotation is not 2.0T GME Engine equipped with same changing the tires, it is recommended to possible for: size tires and wheels on front and rear us the same “AR” marked tires, to 2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a axles maintain the same level of performance and component life. 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear The rotational direction of the tire must tires. be taken into consideration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation pattern for directional tires is shown below.

228 DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road laboratory test wheel. Sustained high TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. temperature can cause the material TIRE QUALITY GRADES Traction Grades of the tire to degenerate and reduce The following tire grading categories tire life, and excessive temperature The Traction grades, from highest to were established by the National can lead to sudden tire failure. The lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Highway Traffic Safety grade C corresponds to a level of grades represent the tire's ability to Administration. The specific grade performance, which all passenger stop on wet pavement, as measured rating assigned by the tire's vehicle tires must meet under the under controlled conditions on manufacturer in each category is Federal Motor Vehicle Safety specified government test surfaces shown on the sidewall of the tires on Standard No. 109. Grades B and A of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. represent higher levels of marked C may have poor traction performance on the laboratory test All passenger vehicle tires must performance. conform to Federal safety wheel, than the minimum required by requirements in addition to these law. grades. Warning! Warning! Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this The temperature grade for this tire comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead is established for a tire that is wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not properly inflated and not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, overloaded. Excessive speed, specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction under-inflation, or excessive For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. loading, either separately or in wear one and one-half times as well combination, can cause heat on the government course as a tire Temperature Grades buildup and possible tire failure. graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon highest), B, and C, representing the the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled variations in driving habits, service conditions on a specified indoor 229 STORING THE VEHICLE compact plastic sheets, as they do not Manual Trunk Opening Device If the vehicle is left inactive for longer allow humidity to evaporate from the Proceed as follows if the battery needs than a month, the following precautions surface of the vehicle. to be disconnected: should be observed: Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) 1. From the trunk interior covering, Park the vehicle in an area that is above the standard prescribed pressure rotate the plug to the left of the lock and covered and dry, and well-ventilated if and check it periodically. extract the strap connected to it. possible. Slightly open the windows. Do not drain the engine cooling 2. Make sure the free end of the strap Check that the electric park brake is system. remains outside the trunk when closing not activated. Any time the vehicle is left inactive for the trunk lid. Carry out the procedure: “manual trunk two weeks or more, operate the air opening device” procedure described in conditioning system with engine idling this paragraph. for at least five minutes, setting external Disconnect the negative battery air and with fan set to maximum speed. terminal and check the battery charge. This operation will ensure appropriate Repeat this check once every three lubrication for the system, thus months during storage. minimizing the possibility of damage to If the battery is not disconnected from the compressor when the system is SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the electrical system, check its state of operated again. charge every thirty days. Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP 09086S0001EM Clean and protect the painted parts and having closed the driver side door, Trunk Compartment using protective wax. wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from 3. The trunk can now be opened Clean and protect the shiny metal the battery. When reconnecting the manually by pulling the strap. parts using special compounds available electrical supply to the battery, make Note: This procedure must be carried commercially. sure that the ignition is in the STOP out exclusively in safe places because it Sprinkle talcum powder on the position and the driver side door is allows to open the trunk unconditionally. windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift closed. them off the glass. Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated plastic sheet, paying particular care not to damage the painted surface by dragging any dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not use 230 BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently Protection Against Atmospheric Paint rinsing the sponge. Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches Rinse well with water and dry with a The vehicle is equipped with the best immediately to prevent the formation of leather chamois. available technological solutions to rust. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door These include: washing the car: the frequency depends frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with on the conditions and environment where Painting products and systems which special care, as water may stagnate more the car is used. For example, it is easily in these areas. Do not wash the car give the vehicle resistance to corrosion advisable to wash the vehicle more often after it has been left in the sun or with the and abrasion. in areas with high levels of atmospheric hood hot: this may alter the shine of the Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) pollution or salted roads. paintwork. steel sheets, with high resistance to Some parts of the vehicle may be Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in corrosion. covered with a matte paint which, in the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Spraying of plastic parts, with a order to be maintained intact, requires If washing the car in a service that moves special care. protective function in the more exposed the car, for with automatic points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. To correctly wash the vehicle, follow transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out. these instructions: Youhave to shut off the engine in the Use of “open” boxed sections to If high pressure jets or cleaners are following conditions: car stopped, prevent condensation and pockets of used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the moisture which could favor the formation of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the starter button for at least three seconds. of rust inside. bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. Note: Avoid parking under trees; the Use of special films to protect against Build up of water could cause damage to resin dropped by trees makes the abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, the vehicle in the long term. paintwork go opaque and increases the doors, etc.). possibility of corrosion. To make it easier to remove any dirt Corrosion Warranty deposits in the area where the blades are Windows normally located it is recommended to Use specific detergents and clean cloths Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion position the windshield wipers vertically to prevent scratching or altering the Warranty against perforation due to rust transparency. of any original element of the structure (service position), for more information, or bodywork. For the general terms of refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. this warranty, refer to the Warranty Wash the bodywork using a low Booklet. pressure jet of water if possible.

231 INTERIORS Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if necessary moistened with water. Caution! Periodically check the cleanliness of the interior, beneath the mats, which could The use of paper tissues is not cause oxidation of the sheet metal. recommended as these may leave Wipe the rear window inside gently with a residues. Seats And Fabric Parts cloth following the direction of the filaments Genuine Leather Parts — If Equipped to avoid damaging the heating device. Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. Rub the seats with a Use only water and mild soap to clean Front Headlights sponge moistened with a solution of these parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Use a soft cloth soaked in water and water and neutral detergent. detergent for washing cars. Before using a specific product for Leather Seats cleaning interiors, make sure that it does Note: Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances. Never use aromatic substances (e.g. slightly damp cloth, without exerting too gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for much pressure. cleaning the plastic lenses of the Remove any liquid or grease stains using headlights. an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin When cleaning with a pressure cloth dampened with water and mild SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE washer, keep the pressure washer at soap. If the stain persists, use specific least eight inches (20 cm) away from the products and observe the instructions headlights. carefully. Engine Compartment Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that At the end of every winter, wash the the cleaning products used contain no engine compartment thoroughly, taking alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in care not to aim the jet of water directly at small quantities. the electronic control units or at the Plastic And Coated Parts windshield wiper motors. Have this operation performed at a specialized Clean interior plastic parts with a damp workshop. cloth (if possible made from microfiber), and a solution of water and neutral, Note: The washing should take place with non-abrasive detergent. the engine cold and the ignition device in the STOP position. After the washing To clean oily or persistent stains, use operation, make sure that the various specific products free from solvents and protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards) designed to maintain the original have not been removed or damaged. appearance and color of the components. 232 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 234 those who just want to know every detail ENGINE ...... 235 of their vehicle, useful information on POWER SUPPLY ...... 236 understanding how your vehicle works is TRANSMISSION ...... 237 contained in this chapter and illustrated BRAKES ...... 238 with data, tables and graphics. SUSPENSION ...... 239 STEERING SYSTEM...... 240 DIMENSIONS...... 241 WEIGHTS ...... 243 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 244 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 246 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 247 PERFORMANCE ...... 249

233 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also printed on the chassis Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at the front left shock absorber and can Plate Vehicle Identification Number be seen by opening the engine The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard cover, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). the windshield. Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA

10016S0002EM and Canada only). Vehicle Identification Number TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10016S0001EM Vehicle Identification Number

234 ENGINE

2.0 T4 MAir Engine 280 HP Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84/90 Total displacement (cm³) 1,995 Compression ratio 10:1 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280 Maximum power (kW) 209 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306 Maximum torque (Nm) 415 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3,300 – 4,400 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is Fuel 0–15%.

235 POWER SUPPLY

Power Supply 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

236 TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction Rear-wheel drive 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse or All-wheel drive

237 BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake 2.0 T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

238 SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension

239 STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m) steering TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

240 DIMENSIONS Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

10106S0001EM

241 H I A C D E B F G Overall Overall Front Rear Overall Overall Front Track Rear Track Width (Incl. Width (Excl. Overhang Overhang Length Height Mirrors) Mirrors) 56.54 Inches(+) 61.30 Inches(+) 63.98 Inches(+) 31.30 Inches 111.02 Inches 40.47 Inches 182.80 Inches 57.09 Inches(*) 61.38 Inches(*) 63.15 Inches(*) 79.69 Inches 73.23 Inches

(+) RWD models (*) AWD models Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

242 WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With AWD 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With RWD Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and 3602 3492 without optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 905 905 Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 155 – front axle 2205 2205 – rear axle 2646 2646 – total 4723 4612 (*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

243 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated gasoline contains CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications oxygenates and are specifically blended Modifications that allow the engine to This engine is designed to reduce vehicle emissions and improve run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or to meet all emission air quality. regulations, and liquid propane (LP) may result in damage provide satisfactory The use of reformulated gasoline is to the engine, emissions, and fuel system fuel economy and recommended. Properly blended components. Problems that result from performance when reformulated gasoline will provide running CNG or LP are not the using high-quality improved performance and durability of responsibility of the manufacturer and unleaded “Regular” engine and fuel system components. may void or not be covered under the gasoline having a posted octane number Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends New Vehicle Limited Warranty. of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ MMT In Gasoline 2 method. For optimal performance the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline with oxygenates such as Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese gasoline is recommended in these ethanol. Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- engines. containing metallic additive that is While operating on gasoline with the Caution! blended into some gasoline to increase required octane number, hearing a light octane. Gasoline blended with MMT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS knocking sound from the engine is not a provides no performance advantage cause for concern. However, if the engine DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing beyond gasoline of the same octane methanol, or gasoline containing more than number without MMT. Gasoline blended is heard making a heavy knocking sound, 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends see your dealer immediately. Use of with MMT reduces spark plug life and may result in starting and drivability reduces emissions system performance gasoline with a lower than recommended problems, damage critical fuel system octane number can cause engine failure components, cause emissions to exceed the in some vehicles. The manufacturer and may void or not be covered by the applicable standard, and/or cause the recommends that gasoline without MMT New Vehicle Limited Warranty. “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the Poor quality gasoline can cause problems Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask such as hard starting, stalling, and greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). your gasoline retailer whether the hesitations. If you experience these gasoline contains MMT. MMT is symptoms, try another brand of gasoline prohibited in Federal and California before considering service for the Problems that result from using gasoline reformulated gasoline. vehicle. containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not Reformulated Gasoline the responsibility of the manufacturer Many areas of the country require the and may void or not be covered under use of cleaner burning gasoline referred New Vehicle Limited Warranty. to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. 244 Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that Caution! contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives Follow these guidelines to maintain your will help improve fuel economy, reduce vehicle’s performance: emissions, and maintain vehicle The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can performance. impair engine performance and damage the Designated TOP TIER emissions control system. Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the of detergents to catalytic converter to overheat. If you further aide in notice a pungent burning odor or some light minimizing engine and smoke, your engine may be out of tune or fuel system deposits. malfunctioning and may require immediate When available, the usage of TopTier service. Contact an authorized dealer for Detergent gasoline is recommended. service assistance. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of The use of fuel additives, which are now TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. being sold as octane enhancers, is not Indiscriminate use of fuel system recommended. Most of these products cleaning agents should be avoided. Many contain high concentrations of methanol. of these materials intended for gum and Fuel system damage or vehicle varnish removal may contain active performance problems resulting from the solvents or similar ingredients. These can use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm void or not be covered under the New materials. Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Note: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

245 FLUID CAPACITIES 2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters Engine cooling system 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters Engine sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters 9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.4 Liters (RWD Model) /

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.8 Quarts (AWD Model) 9.3 Liters (AWD Model) Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV – – RDU 230-LSD differential - if equipped 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters RDU 210/215-LSD differential - if equipped 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

246 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. Engine Lubrication

Use Features Specification Replacement interval Lubricant for engines SAE 0W-30 MS-13340 According to the Maintenance Plan 2.0 T4 MAir API SN 9.55535–GS1

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

247 Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission Differential RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU SAE 75W-85 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9 210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD / Lubricants and greases 2.0 T4 MAir engine SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 synthetic FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case lubricant SAE 75W synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes CUNA NC 956-16 Use rate 50% Not mixable with Engine coolant MS.90032 ASTMD3306 different formulation products. (*) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems R1234yf or R134yf HVAC –– (depending on market) (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

248 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Acceleration from Models Maximum speed mph 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec. 2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP RWD engine 149 5.5 2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 149 5.1

249 This page is intentionally left blank

250 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .252 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 252 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....254 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .254 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .255

251 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE manufacturer's customer center should The manufacturer and its authorized include the following information: Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's name and address If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Owner's telephone number (home and well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an office) authorized dealer. We strongly be performed may not be covered by the Authorized dealer name warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle the best, and are most concerned log of your vehicle's service history, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized Alfa Romeo Customer Center dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest P.O.Box 21–8004 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 problems or the specific work you want correctly and in a timely manner. Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA done. If you've had an accident or work This is why you should always talk to an (1-844-253-2872) authorized dealer service manager first. done that is not on your maintenance log, Alfa Romeo Customer Center (Canada) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. P.O.Box 1621 Be Reasonable With Requests If for some reason you are still not Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you If an authorized dealer is unable to may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal resolve the concern, you may contact the daily charge. If you need a rental, it is manufacturer's customer center. advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

252 Customer Assistance For The Hearing manufacturer's Service Contract Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) National Customer Hotline at Warning! 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, To assist customers who have hearing call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) difficulties, the manufacturer has 387-9983 French). installed special TDD Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines (Telecommunication Devices for the The manufacturer will not stand behind only), some of its constituents, and certain any service contract that is not the vehicle components contain, or emit, Deaf) equipment at its customer center. chemicals known to the State of California Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract to cause cancer and birth defects, or other customer, who has access to a TDD or a reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the other than the manufacturer's service contained in vehicles and certain products of United States, can communicate with the contract. If you purchased a service component wear contain, or emit, chemicals manufacturer by dialing contract that is not a manufacturer's known to the State of California to cause 1-800-380-2479. service contract, and you require service cancer and birth defects, or other after the manufacturer's New Vehicle reproductive harm. Canadian residents with hearing Limited Warranty expires, please refer to difficulties that require assistance can the contract documents, and contact the use the special needs relay service person listed in those documents. offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for We appreciate that you have made a Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to major investment when you purchased connect with a Bell Relay Service the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also operator. made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are Service Contract absolutely delighted with the ownership Youmay have purchased a service experience. Youwill be pleased with their contract for a vehicle to help protect you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty from the high cost of unexpected repairs issues or related concerns. after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the 253 WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States And If you believe that your vehicle has a for the terms and provisions of FCA US Washington, D.C. safety defect, you should contact the LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties Customer Service Department applicable to this vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or immediately. Canadian customers cause injury or death, you should who wish to report a safety defect to immediately inform the National the Canadian government should Highway Traffic Safety contact Transport Canada, Motor Administration (NHTSA) in addition Vehicle Defect Investigations and to notifying FCA US LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to If NHTSA receives similar http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ . complaints, it may open an CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov ;or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . 254 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Owner's Manuals To order the following manuals, you may Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled These Owner's Manuals have been use either the website or the phone with diagrams, charts and detailed prepared with the assistance of service numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, illustrations. These practical manuals and engineering specialists to acquaint American Express, and Discover orders make it easy for students and technicians you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. are accepted. to find and fix problems on Included are starting, operating, computer-controlled vehicle systems and emergency and maintenance procedures Service Manuals features. They show exactly how to find as well as specifications, capabilities and These comprehensive Service Manuals and correct problems the first time, using safety tips. provide the information that students step-by-step troubleshooting and Call toll free at: and professional technicians need in drivability procedures, proven diagnostic diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem tests and a complete list of all tools and 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) solving, maintaining, servicing, and equipment. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the Or vehicle, system, and/or components is Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: written in straightforward language with www.techauthority.com illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

255 This page is intentionally left blank

256 INDEX Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....148 Checking Levels ...... 202 Alfa DNA System...... 146 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .129 Accessories Purchased By The Owner...... 3 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....92 Checks, Safety ...... 129 Active Safety Systems ...... 92 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 32 Child Restraint ...... 119 Adaptive Cruise Control...... 154 Automatic Headlights ...... 33 Child Restraints Booster Seats ...... 122 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Automatic Temperature Control (Cruise Control) ...... 154 (ATC)...... 42 Child Restraints ...... 119 Additional Heaters...... 47 Automatic Transmission ...... 140 Child Seat Installation ...... 127 Additives, Fuel ...... 245 Auxiliary Driving Systems ...... 95 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ...... 126 AFS Function ...... 34 B-Pillar Location ...... 216 Infants And Child Restraints . . . .121 AirBag...... 111 Battery ...... 204 LATCH Positions ...... 123 Air Bag Operation ...... 113 Battery Recharging ...... 205 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Air Bag Warning Light ...... 110 Belts, Seat ...... 130 Children ...... 123 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 113 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 95 Older Children And Child Enhanced Accident Response . . .196 Restraints ...... 121 Bodywork (Cleaning And Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....196 Maintenance) ...... 231 Seating Positions ...... 122 Front Air Bag ...... 111 Brakes ...... 238 Using The TopTether Anchorage . .128 If A Deployment Occurs ...... 116 Brake Fluid Level ...... 204 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 244 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 113 Brightness, Interior Lights ...... 38 Cleaning Wheels ...... 225 Maintaining YourAir Bag Bulbs, Light ...... 131 System ...... 119 Climate Control ...... 40,44 Redundant Air Bag Warning Camera, Rear ...... 169 Close The Hood...... 51 Light ...... 111 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 129 Compact Spare Tire ...... 225 Side Air Bags ...... 113 Cargo Tie-Downs ...... 53 Contract, Service...... 253 Transporting Pets ...... 129 Certification Label ...... 172 Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb Air Bag Light...... 110,130 Replacement) ...... 181 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 212 Air Bag Maintenance...... 119 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 213 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 220 (Malfunction Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 19 Indicator Light) ...... 88 Cruise Control (Speed Emergency, In Case Of Exterior Lighting ...... 33,34 Control) ...... 152,154 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 178 Exterior Lights ...... 33,131 Cupholder ...... 57 Jacking ...... 212 External Lights ...... 33 INDEX Cupholders ...... 57 Jump Starting ...... 189,190 Customer Assistance ...... 252 Overheating ...... 192 Flashers Tow Hooks ...... 194 Hazard Warning ...... 178 Daytime Running Lights...... 33 Towing...... 193 Turn Signal ...... 35,131 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...... 33 Emission Control System Fluid Leaks ...... 131 Defroster, Windshield ...... 130 Maintenance...... 88 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 247 Dimensions ...... 241 Engine ...... 235 Forward Collision Warning ...... 97 Direction Indicators (Changing A Block Heater ...... 137 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Bulb)...... 181 Engine Coolant Level ...... 204 Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights (Bulb Replacement)...... 181 Disabled VehicleTowing...... 193 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 129 Front Seat Electric Heating ...... 27 Door Locks Fuel Requirements ...... 244 Front Seats (Power Seats) ...... 25 Child-Protection Door Lock — Jump Starting ...... 189,190 Rear Doors ...... 24 Front Wipers Overheating ...... 192 Doors...... 20 Wiper Operation ...... 39 Starting ...... 191 Drive Train Control (DTC) System ....92 Fuel Temperature Gauge ...... 61 Driving Modes ...... 147 Additives ...... 245 Engine Compartment ...... 202 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Clean Air ...... 244 Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .232 System ...... 94 Ethanol ...... 244 Engine Oil Gauge ...... 61 Level Check ...... 203 Electric Park Brake...... 138 Materials Added ...... 245 Engine Overheating ...... 192 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 32 Methanol ...... 244 Electric Steering Wheel Heating.....31 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...... 196 Fuse Boxes ...... 185 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Fuses (Replacement) ...... 183 Control) ...... 152,154 Environmental Protection Systems. . .57 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Ethanol ...... 244 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....54 System ...... 93 Exhaust Gas Caution...... 129 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 244 Emergency Refuelling ...... 191 Exhaust System ...... 129 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 244 Gauges Reconfigurable Instrument Lights...... 131 Speedometer ...... 61 Cluster Display ...... 62 AirBag...... 110,130 Tachometer ...... 61 Instrument Panel Features Automatic Headlights ...... 33 Instrument Panel Features ...... 60 General Information ...... 97,101,161 Courtesy/Reading ...... 36,37 Interior Ambient Lighting ...... 37 Glove Compartment ...... 53 Daytime Running ...... 33 Interior Lights...... 36 Glove Compartment Light ...... 37 Exterior ...... 131 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 232 Glove Compartment Light (Bulb Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 178 Replacement) ...... 182 Internal Equipment ...... 53 Headlight Switch ...... 33,34 GVWR...... 172 Headlights ...... 33,34 Jack Operation ...... 212 High Beam ...... 34 Hazard Warning Flasher...... 178 Jump Starting ...... 189,190 Instrument Cluster ...... 33,34 Head Restraints ...... 29 Intensity Control ...... 38 Head Rests ...... 29 Key Fob Interior ...... 37 Headlights Remote Keyless Entry ...... 14 Switch ...... 33,34 Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer Map Reading ...... 36 System ...... 18 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 232 Park...... 33 Heated Mirrors ...... 32 Reading ...... 36 Lane Change ...... 35 Heater, Engine Block...... 137 Turn Signal ...... 35,131 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 35 High Beam Headlights...... 34 Loading Vehicle ...... 172 Lane Departure Warning System . . .166 Automatic...... 35 High Beam Headlights Tires ...... 216 LaneSense...... 166 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System...... 94 Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 106 Replacement) ...... 182 Hood ...... 51 Latches...... 131 Luggage/Cargo Capacity ...... 52 Hood Release ...... 51 Leaks, Fluid ...... 131 Life Of Tires ...... 223 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Identification Data ...... 234 Engine) ...... 88 Lifting The Vehicle ...... 212 Ignition...... 16 Manual, Service...... 255 Light Bulbs...... 131 Installing Electrical/Electronic Methanol...... 244 Devices...... 3 Types Of Bulbs ...... 179 Mirrors Light Switch...... 33 Instrument Cluster Display Automatic Dimming ...... 32 Instrument Cluster Display ...... 62 Electric Powered ...... 32 Radial Ply Tires ...... 222 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 129 Electric Remote ...... 32 Radio Frequency Saving Fuel ...... 173 Heated ...... 32 General Information ...... 16,18,24 SBL Function ...... 35 INDEX Radio Transmitters And Mobile Scheduled Servicing ...... 198 OBD System ...... 88 Phones ...... 4 Scheduled Servicing Program Occupant Restraints...... 104 Rear Camera ...... 169 (2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) . . .199 Overheating, Engine ...... 192 Rear Cross Path ...... 95 Seat Belt Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . .255 Rear Seats...... 27 Energy Management Feature . . . .109 Rear View Mirrors ...... 32 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .107 Paintwork (Cleaning And Reformulated Gasoline ...... 244 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 106 Maintenance) ...... 231 Refueling Procedure ...... 170 Pregnant Women ...... 109 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ....93 Refueling The Vehicle ...... 170 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 109 Park Sensors System ...... 161 Refuelling ...... 246 Seat Belt Reminder...... 105 Passive Entry (System) ...... 21 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 105 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 105 Performance (Top Speed)...... 249 Remote Starting System ...... 134 Seat Belts ...... 105,130 Pets...... 129 Replacement Tires ...... 224 Child Restraint ...... 119 Placard, Tire And Loading Replacing A Bulb ...... 178 Front Seat ...... 105,106 Information ...... 216 Replacing An External Bulb ...... 181 Inspection ...... 130 Power Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 181 Pregnant Women ...... 109 Mirrors ...... 32 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 254 Pretensioners ...... 109 Seats ...... 25 Restraint, Head...... 29 Rear Seat ...... 106 Sunroof ...... 49 Restraints, Child ...... 119 Untwisting Procedure ...... 107 Power Sunroof ...... 49 Rims And Tires ...... 212 Seats ...... 25 Power Supply ...... 236 Head Restraints ...... 29 Power Windows ...... 48 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 130 Height Adjustment ...... 25 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .109 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....131 Power...... 25 Pretensioners Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 254 Seat Belts ...... 109 Tilting ...... 25 Safety Information, Tire...... 212 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 230 Service Assistance...... 252 Safety Tips ...... 129 Service Contract ...... 253 Service Manuals ...... 255 Suggestions For Driving...... 173 Replacement ...... 224 Servicing Procedures ...... 206 Sun Roof...... 49 Safety ...... 212,220 Shoulder Belts ...... 106 Sun Visors ...... 53 Sizes ...... 213 Signals, Turn...... 35,131 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Snow Tires ...... 227 Snow Chains...... 227 Bag...... 111 Spare Tire ...... 224,225 Snow Tires...... 227 Suspension ...... 239 Spinning ...... 223 Spare Tire ...... 224,225 Symbols ...... 6 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 223 Speed Control To Open Hood...... 51 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 30 Accel/Decel ...... 153 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 194 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...... 53 Cancel ...... 154 Towing Resume ...... 154 Tilt Steering Column...... 30 Disabled Vehicle ...... 193 Set...... 153 Tire And Loading Information TowingTrailers ...... 173 Placard ...... 216 Speed Control (Cruise TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Control) ...... 152,154 Tire Markings ...... 212 System)...... 101 Speed Limiter...... 151 Tire Safety Information ...... 212 Traction Control System (TCS)...... 93 Split Folding Rear Seat ...... 27 Tires ...... 131,220,224,225,229 Transmission ...... 237 Starting ...... 191 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 223 Transporting Animals ...... 174 Cold Weather ...... 135 Air Pressure ...... 220 Transporting Passengers ...... 174 Starting And Operating ...... 191 Changing ...... 212 Transporting Pets ...... 129 Starting Procedures ...... 191 Compact Spare ...... 225 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 223 Starting The Engine ...... 134 General Information . . .220,224,225 Turn Signals ...... 35 Steering High Speed ...... 221 Tilt Column ...... 30 Inflation Pressures ...... 220 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 229 Wheel, Heated ...... 31 Jacking ...... 212 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .107 Wheel, Tilt ...... 30 Life Of Tires ...... 223 Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 5 Steering System ...... 240 Load Capacity ...... 216,217 Steering Wheel ...... 30 Quality Grading ...... 229 Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 3 Stop/Start System...... 149 Radial ...... 222 Vehicle Identification Number .....234 Storage ...... 56 Vehicle Loading ...... 172,217 Vent Operation ...... 40

INDEX Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 178 Warranty Information ...... 254 Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights...... 204 Washers, Windshield...... 38 Weights ...... 243 Wheel And Wheel Trim...... 225 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 225 Wheels And Tires ...... 212 Windows (Cleaning) ...... 231 Windshield Defroster ...... 130 Windshield Wiper ...... 38 Replacing Blades ...... 208 Windshield Wiper/Washer Smart Washing Function ...... 39 Windshield Wipers ...... 38 Wrecker Towing...... 193

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC 18GABASE-126-AB Second Edition ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Owner’s Manual ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A. 2018 OWNER’S MANUAL